US20230406589A1 - Packaging system - Google Patents
Packaging system Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20230406589A1 US20230406589A1 US17/941,146 US202217941146A US2023406589A1 US 20230406589 A1 US20230406589 A1 US 20230406589A1 US 202217941146 A US202217941146 A US 202217941146A US 2023406589 A1 US2023406589 A1 US 2023406589A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- canceled
- article
- blank
- panel
- articles
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
- B65D71/00—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans or pop bottles; Bales of material
- B65D71/40—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans or pop bottles; Bales of material comprising a plurality of articles held together only partially by packaging elements formed by folding a blank or several blanks
- B65D71/42—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans or pop bottles; Bales of material comprising a plurality of articles held together only partially by packaging elements formed by folding a blank or several blanks formed by folding a single blank into a single layer element
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65B—MACHINES, APPARATUS OR DEVICES FOR, OR METHODS OF, PACKAGING ARTICLES OR MATERIALS; UNPACKING
- B65B17/00—Other machines, apparatus, or methods for packaging articles or materials
- B65B17/02—Joining articles, e.g. cans, directly to each other for convenience of storage, transport, or handling
- B65B17/025—Joining articles, e.g. cans, directly to each other for convenience of storage, transport, or handling the articles being joined by a top carrier element
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65B—MACHINES, APPARATUS OR DEVICES FOR, OR METHODS OF, PACKAGING ARTICLES OR MATERIALS; UNPACKING
- B65B35/00—Supplying, feeding, arranging or orientating articles to be packaged
- B65B35/30—Arranging and feeding articles in groups
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65B—MACHINES, APPARATUS OR DEVICES FOR, OR METHODS OF, PACKAGING ARTICLES OR MATERIALS; UNPACKING
- B65B43/00—Forming, feeding, opening or setting-up containers or receptacles in association with packaging
- B65B43/08—Forming three-dimensional containers from sheet material
- B65B43/10—Forming three-dimensional containers from sheet material by folding the material
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65B—MACHINES, APPARATUS OR DEVICES FOR, OR METHODS OF, PACKAGING ARTICLES OR MATERIALS; UNPACKING
- B65B61/00—Auxiliary devices, not otherwise provided for, for operating on sheets, blanks, webs, binding material, containers or packages
- B65B61/04—Auxiliary devices, not otherwise provided for, for operating on sheets, blanks, webs, binding material, containers or packages for severing webs, or for separating joined packages
- B65B61/06—Auxiliary devices, not otherwise provided for, for operating on sheets, blanks, webs, binding material, containers or packages for severing webs, or for separating joined packages by cutting
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
- B65D71/00—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans or pop bottles; Bales of material
- B65D71/40—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans or pop bottles; Bales of material comprising a plurality of articles held together only partially by packaging elements formed by folding a blank or several blanks
- B65D71/46—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans or pop bottles; Bales of material comprising a plurality of articles held together only partially by packaging elements formed by folding a blank or several blanks formed by folding a single blank into a tubular element
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
- B65D2571/00—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans, pop bottles; Bales of material
- B65D2571/00123—Bundling wrappers or trays
- B65D2571/00129—Wrapper locking means
- B65D2571/00135—Wrapper locking means integral with the wrapper
- B65D2571/00154—Wrapper locking means integral with the wrapper interlocked
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
- B65D2571/00—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans, pop bottles; Bales of material
- B65D2571/00123—Bundling wrappers or trays
- B65D2571/00648—Elements used to form the wrapper
- B65D2571/00654—Blanks
- B65D2571/0066—Blanks formed from one single sheet
-
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B65—CONVEYING; PACKING; STORING; HANDLING THIN OR FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
- B65D—CONTAINERS FOR STORAGE OR TRANSPORT OF ARTICLES OR MATERIALS, e.g. BAGS, BARRELS, BOTTLES, BOXES, CANS, CARTONS, CRATES, DRUMS, JARS, TANKS, HOPPERS, FORWARDING CONTAINERS; ACCESSORIES, CLOSURES, OR FITTINGS THEREFOR; PACKAGING ELEMENTS; PACKAGES
- B65D2571/00—Bundles of articles held together by packaging elements for convenience of storage or transport, e.g. portable segregating carrier for plural receptacles such as beer cans, pop bottles; Bales of material
- B65D2571/00123—Bundling wrappers or trays
- B65D2571/00833—Other details of wrappers
- B65D2571/0087—Special features for machine processing, e.g. gripper apertures
Definitions
- the present invention relates to packaging systems, to packaging machines and apparatus therefor, to article carriers and blanks for forming the same, and to methods of packaging articles. More specifically, but not exclusively, the invention relates to a carrier of the top-gripping type having one or more apertures for receiving and retaining an article therein and to methods and apparatus for forming the same.
- cartons for carrying multiple articles.
- Cartons are well known in the art and are useful for enabling consumers to transport, store and access a group of articles for consumption.
- Such cartons or carriers need to be formed from as little material as possible and cause as little wastage in the materials from which they are formed as possible. Further considerations are the strength of the carton and its suitability for holding and transporting large weights of articles. It is desirable that the contents of the carton are secure within the carton.
- top gripping article carriers in which an aperture is formed in a panel of the carrier, wherein tabs are struck from said panel and are arranged about the aperture. The tabs are displaced out of the plane of said panel when an article is received in the aperture, wherein said tabs engage the article generally about a flange or lip of the article.
- a packaging machine capable of operating at high production capacities.
- the present invention seeks to provide an improvement in the field of packaging, of cartons, typically formed from paperboard or the like, and apparatus for assembly of said cartons.
- a first aspect of the invention provides an article engaging carrier for packaging at least one article.
- the carrier comprises a main panel having at least one article retention structure for engaging an article.
- the carrier comprises at least one panel having a peripheral edge, a portion of which provides at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device of a packaging apparatus.
- the article carrier comprises a side panel hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection.
- the at least one registration edge is provided by a peripheral edge portion of the side panel.
- the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- the article carrier comprises a cover panel hingedly connected to the side panel by a hinged connection.
- the at least one registration edge is provided by a peripheral edge portion of the cover panel.
- the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- the article carrier comprises a pair of opposing side panels each hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection and comprising at least one registration edge.
- the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- the article carrier comprises a pair of opposing side panels each hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection, a cover panel hingedly connected to each of the pair of opposing side panels and comprising at least one registration edge.
- the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- the article carrier comprises a pair of opposing end panels each hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection.
- the panel having a peripheral edge portion providing at least one registration edge is hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection.
- the panel having a peripheral edge portion providing at least one registration edge is hingedly connected to the main panel by at least one hinge panel.
- the at least one panel comprises a pair of panels each having a registration edge, a linear notional line passing through the registration edge in each of pair of panels passes through an opening in the main panel defined by the at least one article retention structure.
- the main panel comprises at least one stabilisation device providing an opening in the main panel and configured to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions.
- a second aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier.
- the apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction.
- the article engagement tool comprises a reference device for aligning at least one blank with one or more articles.
- the apparatus comprises an overhead conveyor for conveying the at least one blank onto the one or more articles.
- the reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles.
- the article engagement tool comprises a removable head to which the reference device is mounted.
- the head comprises part of a tool-less attachment system.
- the tool-less attachment system comprises a bayonet fitting.
- the apparatus comprises a plurality of article engagement tools each for engaging a respective article, metering and grouping the articles and conveying said articles in a downstream direction as at least one metered group.
- each of the plurality of article engagement tools is driven independently about an endless track having a working reach and a return reach.
- the plurality of article engagement tools comprises at least one leading article engagement tool and at least one trailing article engagement tool.
- the at least one leading article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective leading registration edge of the at least one blank.
- the at least one trailing article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective trailing registration edge of the at least one blank.
- the abutment pin is shaped to provide at least two points of contact with a registration edge of the at least one blank to inhibit movement of the at least one blank parallel with the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus and laterally with respect to the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus.
- the apparatus comprises an applicator for pressing the at least one blank onto the at least one group of articles
- the applicator comprises a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article of the at least one group of articles formed by the apparatus.
- the applicator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of the at least one blank, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of the at least one blank with respect to the applicator.
- At least one stabilisation peg prevents or inhibits movement of the at least one blank with respect to the at least one group of articles in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus.
- the applicator is mounted to an overhead conveyor, in the form of a wheel, such that the applicator applies the at least one blank to the group of articles as it is conveyed downstream by the plurality of article engagement tools.
- the applicator comprises one or more folding brakes for folding at least one panel hinged to the main panel at least partially about the at least one group of articles, said panel comprising at least one registration edge configured to engage the reference device.
- the apparatus comprises one or more static folding guides for folding one or more panels of the at least one blank whilst the applicator is in engagement with the at least one blank.
- a third aspect of the invention provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles, the method comprising:
- the method further comprises;
- applying the at least one blank to the at least one group of articles comprises;
- applying the at least one blank to the at least one group of articles may further comprise:
- the one or more panels is folded prior to engaging the main panel with the at least one group of articles.
- the one or more panels is folded simultaneously with engaging the main panel with the at least one group of articles.
- the one or more panels is folded after engaging the main panel with the at least one group of articles.
- a fourth aspect of the invention provides a blank for forming an article carrier.
- the blank comprises a main panel having at least one article retention structure for engaging an article.
- the blank comprises at least one panel having a peripheral edge. A portion of the peripheral edge provides at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device of a packaging apparatus.
- a fifth aspect of the invention provides an applicator device for separating a plurality of connected blanks into discrete blanks and pressing each a blank onto two or more groups of articles, the applicator comprises a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article and a disconnecting device for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed blanks.
- the applicator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of each blank, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of said blank with respect to the applicator.
- the at least one stabilisation peg is detachably mounted to a plate in which the article receiving orifices are provided.
- the at least one stabilisation peg is keyed to a given receiving location on the plate.
- the at least one stabilisation peg is keyed to a given receiving orientation with respect to the plate.
- the applicator comprises a plate and at least one guide depending therefrom for retaining the groups of articles in a predefined arrangement.
- the disconnecting device comprises one or more blades mounted to a plate in which the article receiving orifices are provided.
- the one or more blades is detachably mounted to the plate.
- the one or more blades comprises at least one detent for engaging a catch in a slot provided in the plate.
- the plate comprises one or more release openings for enabling release of the detent from the catch.
- the plate comprises plurality of blade receiving locations and a plurality of blades that can be reconfigured a desired arrangement to accommodate a given configuration of connected blanks.
- a sixth aspect of the invention provides a disconnecting apparatus for separating a plurality of connected article carriers engaged with groups of articles, the disconnecting apparatus comprises a plate having a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article and a plurality of blade receiving locations each capable of detachably mounting a disconnecting blade for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed carriers, and a plurality of blades is detachably mounted to the plate, the plurality of blades being reconfigurable to a desired arrangement to accommodate a given configuration of connected carriers.
- the plurality of blades is mountable to the plate in first arrangement to separate a first configuration of connected carriers and is mountable to the plate in second, different, arrangement to separate a second, different, configuration of connected carriers.
- a seventh aspect of the invention provides a plurality of connected blanks for forming a plurality of article carriers.
- Each blank is frangibly connected to at least one adjacent blank by a frangible connection comprising at least one pair of connecting nick.
- Each blank comprises an engaging panel having at least one article retention device for receiving and suspending an article therefrom.
- a first article retention device in a first blank and a second article retention device in a second blank define a notional line passing through the centre of each of the first and second article retention devices.
- the notional line is perpendicular to a frangible connection between the first and second blank.
- a pair of connecting nicks are disposed on opposing sides of the notional line.
- the notional line defines a region of closest proximity between the first and second article retention devices.
- An eighth aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier.
- the apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction.
- the article engagement tool comprises a reference device for aligning a plurality of connected blanks with two or more groups of articles.
- the apparatus comprises an applicator for separating the plurality of connected blanks into discrete blanks and pressing each a blank onto the two or more groups of articles, the applicator comprises a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article and a disconnecting device for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed blanks.
- the applicator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of each blank, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of said blanks with respect to the applicator.
- the at least one stabilisation peg prevents or inhibits movement of the blanks with respect to the group of articles in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the blanks through the apparatus and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the blanks through the apparatus.
- the applicator is mounted to an overhead conveyor, in the form of a wheel, such that the applicator applies the blanks to the groups of articles as it is conveyed downstream by the plurality of article engagement tools.
- the apparatus comprises an overhead conveyor for conveying the plurality of connected blanks onto the one or more articles.
- the reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles.
- the article engagement tool comprises a removable head to which the reference device is mounted.
- the apparatus comprises a plurality of article engagement tools each for engaging a respective article, metering and grouping the articles and conveying said articles in a downstream direction as metered groups.
- the plurality of article engagement tools comprises at least one leading article engagement tool and at least one trailing article engagement tool.
- the at least one leading article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective leading registration edge of the plurality of connected blanks.
- the at least one trailing article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective trailing registration edge of the plurality of connected blanks.
- a ninth aspect of the invention provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles, the method comprising:
- a tenth aspect of the invention provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles, the method comprising:
- the method further comprises;
- applying the blanks to the groups of articles comprises;
- An eleventh aspect of the invention provides a plurality of connected blanks for forming a plurality of article carriers.
- Each blank is frangibly connected to at least one adjacent blank by a frangible connection.
- Each blank of the plurality of connected blanks comprises a main panel having at least one article retention structure for engaging an article.
- the plurality of connected blanks comprises at least one panel having a peripheral edge. A portion of the peripheral edge provides at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device of a packaging apparatus.
- a twelfth aspect of the invention provides a separator apparatus for separating a plurality of connected article carriers into discrete article carriers.
- the separator comprises a disconnecting device for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed article carriers.
- the separator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of each article carrier, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of said article carrier with respect to the separator.
- the separator comprises at least one guide for aligning the plurality of connected article carriers therewith.
- the separator comprises a pair of opposed guides for aligning the plurality of connected article carriers therewith, the plurality of connected article carriers being receivable between the pair of opposed guides.
- the separator is mounted to an overhead conveyor and is transferred continuously downstream through a working reach of a packaging machine in synchronicity with the article carriers.
- the reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles, the abutment pin having a head.
- the head provides a reference body.
- the reference body provides a wall for engaging an edge of the at least one blank.
- the wall is a cylindrical wall.
- an upper end of the head is tapered to provide an inclined surface for aligning the at least one blank with the reference body.
- the inclined surface is conical.
- the head comprises a support surface for inhibiting undesired deformation or creasing of the blank in a target region thereof.
- the head comprise a reference body extending from the support surface.
- a thirteenth aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier.
- the apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction.
- the article engagement tool comprises a reference device for aligning a plurality of connected blanks with two or more groups of articles.
- the reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles.
- the abutment pin has a head, the head comprises a support surface for inhibiting undesired deformation or creasing of the plurality of connected blanks in a target region thereof.
- a fourteenth aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier.
- the apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction.
- the article engagement tool comprises a support device for supporting a portion of at least one blank.
- the support device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool.
- the abutment pin has a head.
- the head comprises a support surface for inhibiting undesired deformation of the at least one blank in a target region thereof.
- a feature, or combination of features, of an embodiment disclosed herein may be extracted in isolation from other features of that embodiment.
- a feature, or combination of features, of an embodiment may be omitted from that embodiment.
- FIG. 1 is a plan view from above of a blank for forming a carrier according to embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 2 is a perspective view from above of a carrier formed from the blank of FIG. 1 ;
- FIG. 3 is a plan view from above of a blank for forming a carrier according to various embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 4 is a perspective view from above of a carrier formed from the blank of FIG. 3 ;
- FIG. 5 A is a plan view from above of a blank for forming a carrier according to embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 5 B is an enlarged plan view of a portion of the blank of FIG. 5 A ;
- FIG. 6 is a perspective view from above of a carrier formed from the blank of FIG. 5 A ;
- FIG. 7 is a perspective view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 8 is an end view of the packaging apparatus of FIG. 7 ;
- FIG. 9 is a plan view of the packaging apparatus of FIG. 7 ;
- FIG. 10 is a perspective view from below of the packaging apparatus of FIG. 7 ;
- FIG. 11 is a perspective view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to alternative embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 12 is a side view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 13 is a plan view from above of a pair of connected blanks each for forming a carrier according to an embodiment of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 14 to 17 illustrate stages of construction of the connected blanks of FIG. 13 into carriers by an applicator device
- FIG. 18 illustrates disconnecting blades according to various embodiments for use with an applicator device
- FIG. 19 is a side view of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packaging system according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 20 is a perspective view from below of a separation device forming a part of a packing system according to alternative embodiments of the present disclosure
- FIG. 21 is an end view of the separation device of FIG. 20 ;
- FIG. 22 is a sectional view of the separation device of FIG. 20 ;
- FIG. 23 is a cutaway view of the separation device of FIG. 20 in operational engagement with a plurality of packaged groups of articles;
- FIG. 24 is a side view of a packaging apparatus showing various stages of operation of separation devices according to the embodiment of FIG. 20 ;
- FIG. 25 is a perspective view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to embodiments of the present disclosure.
- FIG. 26 is an enlarged perspective view from above of a portion of the packaging apparatus of FIG. 25 .
- FIG. 1 there is shown a plan view of a blank 10 which is capable of forming a carton or carrier 90 , as shown in FIG. 2 , for containing and carrying a group of primary products such as, but not limited to, bottles or cans, hereinafter referred to as articles B, as shown in FIG. 2 .
- the articles B may be generally cylindrical; the articles B may comprise a circular cross-sectional shape, at least about a region of engagement with the carrier 90 .
- the blank 10 forms a secondary package for packaging at least one primary product container or package.
- Alternative blanks 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B are shown in FIGS. 3 to 6 and FIGS. 13 to 17 for forming an alternative cartons or carriers 190 ; 390 ; 490 .
- the terms “carton” and “carrier” refer, for the non-limiting purpose of illustrating the various features of the invention, to a container for engaging and carrying articles, such as primary product containers. It is contemplated that the teachings of the invention can be applied to various product containers, which may or may not be tapered and/or cylindrical. Exemplary containers include bottles (for example metallic, glass or plastics bottles), cans (for example aluminium cans), tins, pouches, packets and the like.
- the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B are formed from a sheet of suitable substrate.
- suitable substrate includes all manner of foldable sheet material such as paperboard, corrugated board, cardboard, plastic, combinations thereof, and the like. It should be recognised that one or other numbers of blanks may be employed, where suitable, for example, to provide the carrier structure described in more detail below.
- the packaging structures or cartons described herein may be formed from a sheet material such as paperboard, which may be made of or coated with materials to increase its strength.
- a sheet material such as paperboard
- An example of such a sheet material is tear-resistant NATRALOCK® paperboard made by WestRock Company.
- the tear resistant materials may be provided by more than one layer, to help improve the tear-resistance of the package.
- one surface of the sheet material may have different characteristics to the other surface.
- the surface of the sheet material that faces outwardly from a finished package may be particularly smooth and may have a coating such as a clay coating or other surface treatment to provide good printability.
- the surface of the sheet material that faces inwardly may, on the other hand, be provided with a coating, a layer, a treatment or be otherwise prepared to provide properties such as one or more of tear-resistance, good glue-ability, heat sealability, or other desired functional properties.
- the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 are configured to form a carton or carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 ; for packaging an exemplary arrangement of exemplary articles B.
- the arrangement is a 2 ⁇ 4 matrix or array—two rows of four articles B are provided—and the articles B are beverage cans.
- the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 can be configured to form a carrier for packaging other types, number and size of articles and/or for packaging articles in a different arrangement or configuration.
- the embodiments illustrated in FIGS. 1 to 6 the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 are configured to accommodate beverage cans of the sleek or slim design that may be 330 ml cans.
- the articles B are substantially of the same diameter over their entire height.
- An exemplary article B has a maximum diameter or lateral dimension (the diameter may be about 2.25 inches or about 58 mm).
- the article B comprises an upper portion or top closure which has a diameter or lateral dimension (the diameter may be about 2.125 inches or 54.8 mm).
- the neck may provide an outwardly projecting flange, that is to say it may comprise an undercut for engaging with the carrier.
- a top closure may be attached to the side wall of the article B to form a seam or “chime” which provides the flange.
- the variation in diameter between the top closure and the main body of the article B is less than 7 mm, may be less than 5 mm and optionally is less than 4 mm.
- the terms “sleek” or “slim” refer to articles B which have little or no variation in their lateral dimension between the top closure which engages with the carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 and the main body of the article B.
- the articles B are substantially parallel sided or of substantially uniform diameter.
- FIG. 1 there is shown a blank 10 comprising a plurality of panels 12 , 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 , including a main panel 12 for forming a top wall or an engaging panel of a carrier 90 (see FIG. 2 ).
- the blank 10 includes a first end panel 14 hingedly connected to a first end of the main panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 13 .
- the blank 10 includes a second end panel 16 hingedly connected to a second side of the main panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 15 .
- the blank 10 includes a first side panel 18 hingedly connected to a first side of the main panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 17 .
- the blank 10 includes a second side panel 20 hingedly connected to a second side of the main panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 19 .
- the main panel 12 includes at least one article retention structure RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the main panel 12 comprises a plurality of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 specifically eight article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 arranged in 4 ⁇ 2 matrix or array.
- the main panel 12 comprises two columns of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 , each column comprises four article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the main panel 12 comprises four rows of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 , each row comprises two article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- Each of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 may comprise an aperture A 1 , A 2 .
- the blank 10 comprises four first article retention structures RT 1 .
- the first article retention structures RT 1 are located adjacent to ends of the main panel 12 .
- the blank 10 comprises four second article retention structures RT 2 .
- the second article retention structures RT 2 are located between a first pair of first article retention structures RT 1 disposed proximate a first end of the main panel 12 and a second pair of first article retention structures RT 1 disposed proximate a second end of the main panel 12 .
- the second article retention structures RT 2 are also referred to herein as intermediate article retention structures RT 2 .
- the first article retention structures RT 1 are also referred to herein as end article retention structures RT 1 .
- Each of the first article retention structures RT 1 is substantially similar in construction and will therefore be described in detail with reference to a first one of the first article retention structures RT 1 located adjacent to a first end of the blank 10 as shown in FIG. 1 .
- the first article retention structure RT 1 comprises an article receiving opening defined in part by an aperture A 1 .
- the first article retention structure RT 1 comprises a plurality of engaging teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c disposed about the aperture A 1 .
- the plurality of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c are hinged to the main panel 12 by a fold line.
- the fold line may be defined by a plurality of cut lines 43 , 45 .
- the plurality of cut lines 43 , 45 may define or approximate a squircle or rounded square.
- the first article retention structure RT 1 may comprise a plurality of first or full teeth 40 a disposed about the aperture A 1 .
- Each of the plurality of first teeth 40 a comprises an engaging edge E 1 opposing a hinged edge.
- the engaging edges E 1 are defined by a linear portion of a cut line defining the aperture A 1 .
- Each engaging edge E 1 defines a part of a polygon.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises four first teeth 40 a .
- Each tooth 46 comprises a pair of side edges, the side edges are defined by cut lines 41 extending radially outward from respective vertices of the polygon. That is to say from a respective vertex between a pair of adjacent linear portions of the cut line defining the aperture A 1 .
- the cut lines 41 are divergently arranged with respect to each other and define an angle therebetween, the angle may be about 22.5°.
- the first article retention structure RT 1 may comprise a plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 is aligned with one of the radial cut lines 41 such that said one of the radial cut lines 41 or a notional extension thereof bisects a respective one of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 is spaced apart from said one of the radial cut lines 41 bisecting it so as to define a connecting nick or bridge portion between a pair of adjacently disposed teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 may be linear in shape.
- the first article retention structure RT 1 may comprise a plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45 .
- Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45 is disposed between a pair of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 and is spaced apart therefrom so as to define a pair of connecting nick or bridge portions between each tooth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c and the main panel 12 .
- the pair of connecting nick or bridge portions provide a hinged or foldable connection between each tooth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c and the main panel 12 .
- Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45 may be linear in shape. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 may be arcuate or curved. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45 may be arcuate or curved.
- the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45 is equal to the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 however in other embodiments it may be different.
- the plurality of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c is interrupted by a first recess or cutaway C 1 .
- the first recess C 1 lies upon a first notional line.
- First notional line extends radially through the centre of the aperture A 1 and passes through the centre of the first recess C 1 .
- the first notional line extends transversely of the blank 10 .
- the first notional line may extend along the grain of the blank 10 .
- the first notional line may be oriented parallel with respect to the grain direction.
- the plurality of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c is interrupted by a second recess or cutaway C 2 .
- the second recess C 2 lies upon a second notional line.
- Second notional line extends radially from the centre of the aperture A 1 and passes through the centre of the second recess C 2 .
- the second notional line extends longitudinally of the blank 10 .
- the second notional line may extend across the grain of the blank 10 .
- the second notional line may be oriented perpendicularly with respect to the grain direction.
- the first recess C 1 is dimensioned so as to occupy a first arc defined by a first minor sector.
- the first minor sector is defined in part by a first sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A 1 and passing through a side edge of a first partial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a first side of the first recess C 1 and in part by a second sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A 1 and passing through a side edge of a second partial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a second, opposing, side of the first recess C 1 .
- the second recess C 2 is dimensioned so as to occupy a second arc defined by a second minor sector.
- the second minor sector is defined in part by a third sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A 1 and passing through a side edge of a third partial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a first side of the second recess C 2 and in part by a fourth sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A 1 and passing through a side edge of a fourth partial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a second, opposing, side of the second recess C 2 .
- the first and third sector notional lines define a first toothed sector or arc therebetween.
- the second and fourth sector notional lines define a second toothed sector or arc therebetween.
- the first article retention structure RT 1 may comprise at least one tab 42 , 44 .
- the illustrated embodiment comprises a pair of tabs 42 , 44 .
- the tabs 42 , 44 are located orthogonally to each other about the perimeter of the opening.
- the tabs 42 , 44 may engage an article received in first article retention structure RT 1 , the tabs 42 , 44 do not support or bear the load (or part thereof) of the article B.
- the tabs 42 , 44 facilitate folding of the side and end panels 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 and/or retention of the side and end panels 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 in a folded condition.
- Each of the first article retention structures RT 1 may comprise at least one first tab 42 integral with one of the first and second end panels 14 , 16 .
- the first tab 42 is disposed opposite the second recess C 2 .
- a centre of first tab 42 lies upon the second notional line.
- Each of the first article retention structures RT 1 may comprise at least one second tab 44 integral with one of the first and second side panels 18 , 20 .
- the second tab 44 is disposed opposite the first recess C 1 .
- a centre of second tab 44 lies upon the first notional line.
- the first and second tabs 42 , 44 are defined, at least in part, by a cut line.
- the cut line is substantially ‘U’ shaped.
- the cut line is asymmetric.
- the cut line comprises a base portion defining a portion of the aperture A 1 and a pair of leg portions extending therefrom.
- a first one of the leg portions is longer than a second one of the leg portions.
- the first leg portion may terminate in a ‘J’ or ‘C’ shaped cut.
- the first leg portion is disposed in closer proximity to a corner of the main panel 12 than the second leg portion.
- the first article retention structures RT 1 may comprise second partial teeth 40 c disposed upon opposing sides of each of the first and second tabs 42 , 44 .
- the second partial teeth 40 c are separated from one of the first or second tabs 42 , 44 by one of the first or second leg portions of the ‘U’ shaped cut line.
- the first and second tabs 42 , 44 are longer or taller in height than the engaging teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c .
- the first and second tabs 42 , 44 can be considered to extend into the aperture A 1 so as to reduce the width or radius of the aperture A 1 .
- the plurality of first and second circumferential cut lines 43 , 45 define an opening having non-circular shape.
- the opening may be a squircle or truncated circle.
- the full teeth 40 a may have a radial height dimension which is constant over an arc or sector which they define.
- the hinged connection of each full tooth 40 a may define a portion of a circle or may define a portion of a squircle.
- the partial teeth 40 b , 40 c may have a radial height dimension that varies across their width.
- the height of the partial teeth 40 b , 40 c , the distance between the hinged connection to the main panel 12 and the opposing free edge defined by the aperture A 1 may reduce as towards a recess C 1 , C 2 or tabs 42 , 44 .
- the first article retention structures RT 1 may comprise discrete groups of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c , defined between a pair of recess C 1 , C 2 , between a pair of tabs 42 , 44 or between one of the recesses C 1 , C 2 and one of the tabs 42 , 44 .
- Each group of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c may comprise one full tooth 40 a and a pair of partial teeth 40 b , 40 c .
- a partial tooth 40 b , 40 c may be disposed on opposite sides of the full tooth 40 a and separated therefrom by a radial cut line 41 .
- the first article retention structures RT 1 may comprise at least one, two or more discrete groups of at least two, three, or more teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c.
- Each group of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c is hinged to the main panel 12 by a hinged connection
- the hinged connection is non-circular in shape, and may be defined by a portion of a squircle, truncated circle, flattened circle or rounded square.
- the shape may be or approximate a superellipse or hyperellipse.
- Each of the second article retention structures RT 2 is substantially similar in construction and will therefore be described in detail with reference to a first one of the second article retention structures RT 2 located adjacent to the first one of the first article retention structures RT 1 as shown in FIG. 1 .
- the second article retention structure RT 2 comprises an article receiving opening defined in part by a second aperture A 2 .
- the second article retention structure RT 2 comprises a plurality of teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c disposed about the second aperture A 2 .
- the plurality of teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c are hinged to the main panel 12 by a fold line.
- the fold line may be defined by a plurality of cut lines 53 , 55 .
- the plurality of cut lines 53 , 55 may define or approximate a squircle.
- the second aperture A 2 may comprise a plurality of first or full teeth 50 a disposed about the second aperture A 2 .
- Each of the plurality of first teeth 50 a comprises an engaging edge E 2 opposing a hinged edge.
- the engaging edges E 2 are defined by a linear portion of a cut line defining the second aperture A 2 .
- Each engaging edge E 2 defines a part or side of a polygon.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises four first teeth 50 a together defining a portion of a polygon.
- Each tooth 50 a comprises a pair of side edges, the side edges are defined by cut lines 51 extending radially outward from respective vertices of the polygon. That is to say from a respective vertex between a pair of adjacent linear portions of the cut line defining the second aperture A 2 .
- the cut lines 51 are divergently arranged with respect to each other and define an angle therebetween, the angle may be about 22.5°.
- the second article retention structure RT 2 may comprise a plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 is aligned with one of the radial cut lines 51 such that said one of the radial cut lines 41 , or a notional extension thereof, bisects a respective one of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 is spaced apart from said one of the radial cut lines 41 bisecting it so as to define a connecting nick or bridge portion between a pair of adjacently disposed teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c .
- the connecting nick or bridge portion is disposed proximate a base of the teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c.
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 may be linear in shape.
- the second article retention structure RT 2 may comprise a plurality of second circumferential cut lines 55 .
- Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 55 is disposed between a pair of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 and is spaced apart therefrom so as to define a pair of connecting nick or bridge portions between each tooth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c and the main panel 12 .
- the pair of connecting nick or bridge portions provide a hinged or foldable connection between each tooth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c and the main panel 12 .
- Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 55 may be linear in shape.
- the plurality of teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c is interrupted by a first recess or cutaway C 1 , by a second recess or cutaway C 2 and by a third recess or cutaway C 3 .
- the second and third recesses C 2 , C 3 each lie upon the second notional line extending longitudinally of the blank 10 .
- the second notional line extends radially from the centre of the second aperture A 2 and passes through the centre of each of the second and third recesses C 2 , C 3 .
- the first and second recesses C 1 , C 2 are substantially similar in construction and arrangement to the first and second recesses C 1 , C 2 of the first article retention structures RT 1 .
- the third recess is substantially similar in construction and arrangement to the second recess C 1 , C 2 albeit in opposition thereto.
- the second and third recesses C 2 , C 3 are diametrically opposed to each other.
- the first recess C 1 is oriented or disposed substantially orthogonally to the second and third recesses C 2 , C 3 .
- the centres of the second and third recesses C 2 , C 3 of the second article retention structure RT 2 are collinear with the centre of the second recess C 2 of the first article retention structure RT 1 .
- the third recess C 3 of the second article retention structure RT 2 is disposed proximate to the second recess C 2 of the first article retention structure RT 1 and is oriented in opposition thereto.
- Each of the first recesses C 1 of the second article retention structures RT 2 is disposed proximate to a first recess C 1 of an adjacently disposed second article retention structures RT 2 , and is oriented in opposition thereto.
- Each of the first recesses C 1 of the first article retention structures RT 1 is disposed proximate to a first recess C 1 of an adjacently disposed first article retention structures RT 1 , and is oriented in opposition thereto.
- the second article retention structure RT 2 may comprise at least one tab 54 .
- the illustrated embodiment comprises a single tab 54 .
- the tab 54 may engage an article received in second article retention structure RT 2 , the tab 54 does not support or bear the load (or part thereof) of the article B.
- the tab 54 facilitates folding of one of the side panels 18 , 20 and/or retention of the side panels 18 , 20 in a folded condition.
- Each of the second article retention structure RT 2 comprises at tab 54 integral with one of the first and second side panels 18 , 20 .
- the tab 54 is disposed opposite the first recess C 1 .
- a centre of tab 54 lies upon the first notional line.
- the tabs 54 are defined, at least in part, by a cut line.
- the cut line is substantially ‘U’ shaped.
- the cut line is symmetric.
- the cut line comprises a base portion defining a portion of the aperture A 2 and a pair of leg portions extending therefrom. A first one of the leg portions is equal in length to a second one of the leg portions.
- the second article retention structure RT 2 may comprise second partial teeth 50 c disposed upon opposing sides of the tab 54 .
- the second partial teeth 50 c are separated from the tab 54 by one of the first or second leg portions of the ‘U’ shaped cut line.
- the tab 54 is longer or taller in height than the engaging teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c .
- the tab 54 can be considered to extend into the aperture A 2 so as to reduce the width or radius of the aperture A 2 .
- the plurality of first and second circumferential cut lines 53 , 55 define an opening having non-circular shape.
- the opening may be a squircle or truncated circle.
- the full teeth 50 a may have a radial height dimension which is constant over an arc or sector which they define.
- the hinged connection of each full tooth 50 a may define a portion of a circle.
- the partial teeth 50 b , 50 c may have a radial height dimension that varies across their width.
- the height of the partial teeth 50 b , 50 c , the distance between the hinged connection to the main panel 12 and the opposing free edge defined by the aperture A 2 may reduce as towards a recess C 1 , C 2 , C 3 or tab 54 .
- the second article retention structures RT 2 may comprise discrete groups of teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c , defined between a pair of recess C 1 , C 2 , C 3 or between one of the recesses C 1 , C 2 , C 3 and the tab 44 .
- Each group of teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c may comprise one full tooth 50 a and a pair of partial teeth 50 b , 50 c .
- a partial tooth 50 b , 50 c may be disposed on opposite sides of the full tooth 50 a and separated therefrom by a radial cut line 51 .
- the second article retention structures RT 2 may comprise at least one, two or more discrete groups of at least two, three, or more teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c.
- Each group of teeth 50 a , 50 b , 50 c is hinged to the main panel 12 by a hinged connection
- the hinged connection is non-circular in shape, and may be defined by a portion of a squircle, truncated circle, flattened circle or rounded square.
- the shape may be or approximate a superellipse or hyperellipse.
- the fold line 13 hinging the first end panel 14 to the main panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate.
- the fold line 13 hinging the first end panel 14 to the main panel 12 extends substantially between a pair of adjacently disposed first article retention structures RT 1 .
- the fold line 13 defines a convex hinged portion when viewed from an external viewpoint.
- the fold line 15 hinging the second end panel 16 to the main panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate.
- the fold line 15 hinging the second end panel 16 to the main panel 12 extends substantially between a pair of adjacently disposed first article retention structures RT 1 .
- the fold line 15 defines a convex hinged portion when viewed from an external viewpoint.
- the fold line 17 hinging the first side panel 18 to the main panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate.
- the fold line 17 hinging the first side panel 18 to the main panel 12 comprises plurality of curvilinear portions extending substantially between pairs of adjacently disposed article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the fold line 17 defines a plurality of convex hinged portions when viewed from an external viewpoint.
- the fold line 19 hinging the second side panel 20 to the main panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate.
- the fold line 19 hinging the second side panel 20 to the main panel 12 comprises plurality of curvilinear portions extending substantially between pairs of adjacently disposed article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the fold line 19 defines a plurality of convex hinged portions when viewed from an external viewpoint.
- Each curvilinear hinged portion extends substantially between a pair of tabs 42 , 44 .
- Each curved fold line 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 curves towards and terminates at, or in close proximity to, a curvilinear hinged connection between a group of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c ; 50 a , 50 b , 50 c.
- Each curved fold line 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 and/or curvilinear hinged connection between a group of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c ; 50 a , 50 b , 50 c terminates at, or in close proximity to, an end of a cut line defining a tab 42 , 44 .
- the fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 are defined by a plurality of spaced apart cut lines.
- the curvilinear hinged connection between groups of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c ; 50 a , 50 b , 50 c and the main panel 12 is defined by a plurality of spaced apart circumferential cut lines 43 , 45 , 53 , 55 .
- Each curved fold line 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 converges with a respective curvilinear hinged connection between a group of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c ; 50 a , 50 b , 50 c at, or in close proximity to, a tab 42 , 44 , and may converge at an end of a cut line defining said tab 42 , 44 .
- This may provide the benefit of directing load forces or stresses onto the side wall of the article B so as to increase the structural integrity or rigidity of the carrier 90 ; and may be particularly advantageous for impact forces directed at ends or sides of the carrier 90 .
- the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 may create tension, or a bias, in the side or end walls 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 . This may increase the side or end walls 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 resistance to impacts.
- the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 may create tension or a bias in the side or end walls 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 which may have the effect of creating an over-centre or toggle mechanism creating bi-stability—two stable states or positions, a folded stable position and an unfolded stable position. This may facilitate retention of the side or end walls 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 in a folded condition relative to the main panel 12 either in addition to or alternative to the tabs 42 , 44 . In this way, the requirement of adhesive or other such fastening means may be negated.
- Fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 are non-linear such that at least one end portion thereof is curved toward an adjacent annular fold line about one of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 where the annular fold line is defined by the plurality of circumferential cut lines 43 , 45 , 53 , 55 .
- Fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 are non-linear such that at least one end portion thereof is curved toward an adjacent engaging tooth 40 c.
- Fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 are non-linear such that at least one end portion thereof is curved toward the adjacent article receiving opening or aperture A 1 , A 2 .
- Fold lines 17 , 19 are curved such a first distance d 1 between a terminal end of the fold lines 17 , 19 and a second notional line Y-Y oriented longitudinally of the blank 10 and passing through the centres of receiving apertures A 1 , A 2 is less than a second distance d 2 where second distance d 2 is the maximum distance between the line Y-Y and the respective fold line 17 , 19 .
- the fold lines 13 , 15 are similarly arranged with respect to a first notional line X-X oriented transversely of the blank 10 and passing through the centres of receiving apertures A 1 .
- the first end panel 14 is hingedly connected to the main panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of fold lines 13 a , 13 b .
- the pair of fold lines 13 a , 13 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other.
- the first side panel 18 is hingedly connected to the main panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of fold lines 17 a , 17 b .
- the pair of fold lines 17 a , 17 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other.
- the first end of the first end panel 14 and the first end of the first side panel 18 are hinged about a first corner 12 a of the main panel 12 .
- the first section 13 a of the fold line 13 and the first section 17 a of the fold line 17 are convergently arranged with respect to each other and may be obliquely arranged.
- the first section 13 a of the fold line 13 and the first section 17 a of the fold line 17 define, at least in part, a substantially triangular corner portion of the main panel 12 adjacent to a first article retention structure RT 1 .
- the second end panel 16 is hingedly connected to the main panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of fold lines 15 a , 15 b .
- the pair of fold lines 15 a , 15 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other.
- the second side panel 20 is hingedly connected to the main panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of fold lines 19 a , 19 b .
- the pair of fold lines 97 a , 19 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other.
- the main panel 12 comprises four corner regions 12 a , 12 b , 12 c , 12 d , each is defined, at least in part, by obliquely arranged fold line sections 13 a , 17 a ; 13 b , 19 a ; 15 a , 17 b ; 15 b , 19 b.
- the blank 10 may comprise a handle structure H.
- the handle structure H comprises a handle or finger opening disposed on a longitudinal axis bisecting the main panel 12 .
- the handle opening is provided between a group of four article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the group of four article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 is provided medially of the main panel 12 .
- the handle opening is disposed between a second row of intermediate article retention structures RT 2 and a third row of intermediate article retention structures RT 2 .
- the handle opening is located at the centre of the second group of four article retention structures RT 2 .
- the handle opening lies, at least in part, between a first column of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 and a second column of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the handle opening is defined by a plurality of tabs 60 , 62 .
- the handle opening comprises four tabs 60 , 62 .
- Each tab 60 , 62 is hinged to the main panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- An arcuate or curvilinear cut line may be provided between each fold line to define a corner or vertex of the handle opening.
- the handle opening is substantially rhombus or diamond shaped, in other embodiments other shapes may be employed such as, but not limited to square.
- the handle opening comprises a pair of major tabs 60 and a pair of minor tabs 62 .
- the pair of major tabs 60 are separated from each other by a first cut line or severable line.
- the pair of minor tabs 62 are separated from each other by the first cut line or severable line.
- the pair of major tabs 60 are separated from the pair of minor tabs 62 by a second cut line or severable line.
- the first cut line is colinear with a notional line passing transversely though the centre of the group of four intermediate article retention structures RT 2 .
- the first cut line may be linear in shape and may extend between a first pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening.
- the second cut line may be non-linear in shape and may extend between a second pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening.
- the second cut line intersects the first cutline, the second cut line comprises a “V” or “U” shaped medial portion; a vertex of the “V” or “U” shaped portion intersects the first cutline.
- One of the pair of major tabs 60 is hinged to the main panel 12 by a first fold line.
- the other one of the pair of major tabs 60 is hinged to the main panel 12 by a second fold line.
- the first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the second fold line.
- One of the pair of minor tabs 62 is hinged to the main panel 12 by a third fold line.
- the other one of the pair of minor tabs 62 is hinged to the main panel 12 by a fourth fold line.
- the third fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line.
- the first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the third fold line.
- the second fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line.
- Each of the pair of major tabs 60 may comprise a fold line extending thereacross.
- the fold line may be substantially parallel to the fold line hinging the respective one of the pair of major tabs 60 to the main panel 12 .
- the fold line may extend between the first cut line or severable line and the second cut line or severable line.
- the fold lines across the pair of major tabs 60 may define a “V” shaped fold arranged in opposition to the V” or “U” shaped medial portion of the second cut line.
- the blank 10 may comprise one, two or more alignment or registration devices W 1 , W 2 .
- Each of the registration devices W 1 , W 2 takes the form of a cutaway or recess defining a registration edge of the blank 10 for receiving or engaging a reference pin (discussed in greater detail below).
- the blank 10 comprises a pair of first registration devices W 1 each defining a downstream or leading registration edge.
- the blank 10 may also comprise a pair of registration devices W 2 each defining an upstream or trailing registration edge.
- Each of the cutaways or recesses defining a registration devices W 1 , W 2 is struck from one of the first and second side panels 18 , 20 .
- the registration devices W 1 , W 2 are disposed so as to be offset—inset—from end edges of the main panel 12 .
- the end edges of the main panel 12 are defined by fold lines 13 , 13 a , 13 b , 15 , 15 a , 15 b .
- Insetting the registration devices W 1 , W 2 is advantageous since it allows the tools carrying the reference pin to be more compact, the tools do not extend beyond the footprint of the group of articles in upstream or downstream directions.
- a notional line N 1 passing through the registration edges of the pair of first registration devices W 1 passes through the opening and/or aperture A 1 of a first pair of first article retention structures RT 1 .
- a notional line N 2 passing through the registration edges of the pair of second registration devices W 2 passes through the opening and/or aperture A 1 of a second pair of first article retention structures RT 1 .
- the blank 10 may comprise at least one stabilisation device M.
- the blank 10 comprises two stabilisation devices M.
- the stabilization device takes the form of an opening struck from the blank 10 .
- a first stabilisation device M is disposed between first group of four article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 located proximate a first or leading end edge of the blank 10 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- a second stabilisation device M is disposed between a second group of four article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 located proximate a second or trailing end edge of the blank 10 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the stabilisation devices M are configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below).
- the opening of the stabilisation devices M may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped.
- the opening may be defined by at least one tab 94 struck from the main panel 12 and hingedly connected thereto.
- the opening is defined by a pair of tabs each struck from the main panel 12 and hingedly connected to the main panel 12 in opposition to each other.
- the pair of tabs 94 may be separated from each other by a cut or severable line 95 .
- the stabilisation devices M may be arranged to provide an additional handle opening.
- the stabilisation devices M are generally too small in dimension to accept a finger or portion of a user's finger. This may be advantageous in that a greater amount of substrate material is provided in the main panel 12 between the stabilisation devices M and the openings of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 , whereby improving the robustness and integrity of the article carrier 90 .
- the handle opening may be configured for use as a stabilization device.
- a peg or dog may be provided for engaging the blank 10 via the handle opening to prevent or inhibit linear or rotation movement of the blank 10 with respect to the dog.
- the dog may be mounted to, or integral with, an applicator device, described in more detail below, for applying the blank 10 to a group of articles B.
- the opening of the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one flat or linear portion for engaging a complementary flat or linear portion of the dog.
- the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one generally “V” or “U” shaped portion for engaging a complementary portion of the dog.
- the blank 10 is assembled about a group of articles B.
- the main panel 12 of the blank 10 is applied to the group of articles B.
- the main panel 12 is lowered with respect to the articles B.
- Each of the retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 receives one of the articles B.
- the blank 10 is folded, about fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 , about the sides and ends of the article group to bring the side and end panels into face-to-face relationship therewith.
- the tabs 42 , 44 are folded about side walls of a respective article B.
- the tabs 42 , 44 remain substantially coplanar with the side or end panel 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 from which they extend.
- An inner face of the tabs 43 , 44 abut a side wall, rim or chime of the articles B.
- FIG. 2 shows the assembled carrier 90 , the tabs 42 , 44 abut side walls of the articles B encouraging the side and end panels 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 into a folded condition.
- the corner regions 12 a , 12 b , 12 c , 12 d of the main panel 12 adopt a non-coplanar arrangement with the main panel 12 .
- the corner regions 12 a , 12 b , 12 c , 12 d are inclined upwardly as they extend outwardly due to the convergent nature of the fold line pairs 13 a / 17 a ; 13 b / 19 a ; 15 a / 17 b ; 15 b / 19 b .
- This may be beneficial to impart additional strength or rigidity to the carrier 90 and reduce the likelihood of deformation when the carrier 90 is wrapped in a sheet or film of material such as, but not limited to heat or shrink wrap.
- each of the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 couples or joins with the curvilinear hinged connection between an adjacent group of teeth 40 a , 40 b , 40 c ; 50 a , 50 b , 50 c and the main panel 12 .
- the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 and curvilinear hinged connection may define or form convergent folds or creases in the substrate forming the carrier 90 .
- each of the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 may be coupled or joined to an adjacent curvilinear hinged connection by a third fold or crease.
- the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 and curvilinear hinged connection meet or join in a location disposed in close proximity to an article B.
- the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 have the effect of encouraging the side and/or end walls 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 to bow outwardly—to be convex when viewed from an external vantage point—in regions between a pair of adjacent articles B.
- the curved fold lines 13 , 15 , 17 , 19 have the effect of encouraging the main panel 12 to bow downwardly—to be concave when viewed from an external vantage point above the main panel 112 —in regions between a pair of adjacent articles B.
- the side and/or end walls 14 , 16 , 18 , 20 may be substantially planar.
- FIGS. 3 and 4 there is shown an alternative blank for use in the packaging system of the present disclosure.
- like numerals have, where possible, been used to denote like parts, albeit with the addition of the prefix “100” to indicate that these features belong to the second embodiment.
- the alternative embodiment shares many common features with the embodiment of FIGS. 1 and 2 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2 will be described in any greater detail.
- FIG. 3 shows a blank 110 comprising a plurality of panels 112 , 114 A, 214 B, 116 A, 116 B, 118 , 120 , including a main panel 112 for forming a top wall or engaging panel of a carrier 190 (see FIG. 4 ).
- the main panel 112 comprises at least one article retention structure RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the main panel 112 comprises a plurality of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 , specifically eight article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 arranged in 2 ⁇ 4 matrix or array.
- Each of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 comprises an opening or aperture A 1 , A 2 .
- the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 of FIG. 3 are substantially similar to those of FIG. 1 albeit the tabs 142 , 144 , 154 are smaller in height dimension relative to the teeth 140 than the tabs 42 , 44 , 54 of FIG. 1 .
- a first side panel 118 is hingedly connected to a first side of the main panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 117 .
- a second side panel 120 is hingedly connected to a second side of the main panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 119 .
- the blank 110 comprises a first end structure.
- the first end structure comprises a first upper end panel 114 A hingedly connected to a first end of the main panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 113 A.
- a first lower end panel 114 B is hingedly connected to the first upper end panel 114 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 113 B.
- the first end structure comprises a first corner panel 160 A hingedly connected to a first end of the first side panel 118 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 161 A.
- a second corner panel 160 B is hingedly connected to a first end of the second side panel 120 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 161 B.
- the first end structure comprises a first securing panel 164 A hingedly connected to the first corner panel 160 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 163 A.
- a second securing panel 164 B is hingedly connected to the second corner panel 160 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 163 B.
- a first web panel 168 A is hingedly connected at one end to the first securing panel 164 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 169 A and is hingedly connected at a second end to the first upper end panel 114 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 171 A.
- a second web panel 168 B is hingedly connected at one end to the second securing panel 164 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 169 B and is hingedly connected at a second end to the first upper end panel 114 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 171 B.
- the blank 110 comprises a second end structure.
- the second end structure comprises a second upper end panel 116 A hingedly connected to a second end of the main panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 115 A.
- a second lower end panel 116 B is hingedly connected to the second upper end panel 116 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 115 B.
- the second end structure comprises a third corner panel 162 A hingedly connected to a second end of the first side panel 118 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 165 A.
- a fourth corner panel 162 B is hingedly connected to a second end of the second side panel 120 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 165 B.
- the first end structure comprises a third securing panel 166 A hingedly connected to the third corner panel 162 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 167 A.
- a fourth securing panel 166 B is hingedly connected to the fourth corner panel 162 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 167 B.
- a third web panel 170 A is hingedly connected at one end to the third securing panel 166 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 173 A and is hingedly connected at a second end to the second upper end panel 116 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 175 A.
- a fourth web panel 170 B is hingedly connected at one end to the fourth securing panel 166 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 173 B and is hingedly connected at a second end to the second upper end panel 116 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 175 B.
- first side panel 118 , the first corner panel 160 A, the first securing panel 164 A, the third corner panel 162 A, and the third securing panel 166 A form a first strap 164 A/ 160 A/ 118 / 162 A/ 166 A along a first side of the main panel 112 .
- the second side panel 120 , the second corner panel 160 B, the second securing panel 164 B, the fourth corner panel 162 B, and the fourth securing panel 166 B form a second strap 164 B/ 160 B/ 120 / 162 B/ 166 B along a second side of the main panel 112 .
- the blank 110 comprises first flap 172 hingedly connected to the first lower end panel 114 B by a hinged connection.
- the hinged connection is defined, at least in part, by a cut line V 1 .
- Cut line V 1 defines a tab P 1 extending from an outer or lower edge of the first lower end panel 114 B.
- the cut line V 1 forms a receiver, in the form of an opening, slot or slit, for receiving a locking tab or detent C 1 .
- Each of the first and second securing panels 164 A, 164 B comprises a locking tab or detent C 1 extending from a lower edge thereof.
- the first flap 172 may comprise a pair of wing portions 174 A, 174 B hingedly connected by a respective fold line 177 A, 177 B to a central portion of the first flap 172 .
- the fold lines 177 A, 177 B may be divergently arranged with respect to each other, the fold lines 177 A, 177 B diverge towards the first lower end panel 114 B.
- Each of the first and second securing panels 164 A, 164 B comprises a cutaway in the form of an aperture A 5 .
- Each aperture A 5 forms a second receiver for receiving a respective second locking tab or detent C 2 .
- the first upper end panel 114 A comprises a pair of cut lines 101 , each of which is substantially “U” shaped, each cut line 101 defines a respective detent C 2 .
- the blank 110 comprises second flap 176 hingedly connected to the second lower end panel 116 B by a hinged connection.
- the hinged connection is defined, at least in part, by a cut line V 2 .
- Cut line V 2 defines a second tab P 2 extending from an outer or lower edge of the second lower end panel 116 B.
- the cut line V 2 forms a receiver, in the form of an opening, slot or slit, for receiving a locking tab or detent C 2 .
- Each of the third and fourth securing panels 166 A, 166 B comprises a locking tab or detent C 2 extending from a lower edge thereof.
- the second flap 176 may comprise a pair of wing portions 178 A, 178 B hingedly connected by a respective fold line 178 A, 178 B to a central portion of the second flap 176 .
- the fold lines 179 A, 179 B may be divergently arranged with respect to each other, the fold lines 179 A, 179 B diverge towards the second lower end panel 116 B.
- Each of the third and fourth securing panels 166 A, 166 B comprises a cutaway in the form of an aperture A 5 .
- Each aperture A 5 forms a second receiver for receiving a respective second locking tab or detent C 2 .
- the second upper end panel 116 A comprises a pair of cut lines 101 , each of which is substantially “U” shaped, each cut line 101 defines a respective detent C 2 .
- the end structures are folded to secure the first and second side panels 118 , 120 about sides of a group of articles B.
- the blank 110 can be applied to the group of articles B in a flat form and folded thereabout.
- the main panel 112 is lowered with respect to a group of articles B.
- the first and second side panels 118 , 120 are folded about the opposing sides of the group of articles B.
- the corner panels 160 A, 160 B, 162 A, 162 B are folded about the corners of the group of articles B and the securing panels 164 A, 164 B, 166 A, 166 B are folded about ends of the group of articles B.
- the first and second upper end panels 114 A, 116 A are folded downwards about a respective end of the group of articles B.
- the first and second lower end panels 114 B, 116 B are folded upwardly with respect to the first and second upper end panels 114 A, 116 A such that the detents C 2 can be inserted into the apertures A 5 .
- the first and second lower end panels 114 B, 116 B are folded downwardly to return to a substantially coplanar relationship with the respective one of the first and second upper end panels 114 A, 116 A to which they are hinged.
- the first and second flaps 172 , 176 are folded internally, the wing portion 174 A, 174 B, 176 A, 176 B are folded with respect to the central portion so as to pass the side walls of adjacently disposed articles B, as shown in FIG. 8 .
- the blank 110 may comprise at least one, and may comprise at least two, alignment or registration devices W 1 , W 2 .
- Each of the registration devices W 1 , W 2 takes the form of a cutaway or recess defining a registration edge of the blank 110 for receiving or engaging a reference pin (discussed in greater detail below).
- the blank 110 comprises a pair of first registration devices W 1 each defining a downstream or leading registration edge.
- the blank 110 may also comprise a pair of registration devices W 2 each defining an upstream or trailing registration edge.
- Each of the cutaways or recesses defining a registration devices W 1 , W 2 is struck from one of the first and second side panels 118 , 120 .
- the blank 110 may comprise at least one stabilisation device M.
- the blank 110 comprises two stabilisation devices M.
- the stabilization device takes the form of an opening struck from the blank 110 .
- a first stabilisation device M is disposed between first group of four article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 located proximate a first or leading end edge of the blank 110 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- a second stabilisation device M is disposed between a second group of four article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 located proximate a second or trailing end edge of the blank 110 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the stabilisation devices M are configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below).
- the opening of the stabilisation devices M may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped.
- the opening may be defined by at least one tab 194 struck from the main panel 112 and hingedly connected thereto.
- the opening is defined by a pair of tabs each struck from the main panel 112 and hingedly connected to the main panel 112 in opposition to each other.
- the pair of tabs 194 may be separated from each other by a cut or severable line 195 .
- the stabilisation devices M may be arranged to provide an additional handle opening.
- the stabilisation devices M are generally too small in dimension to accept a finger or portion thereof of a user's finger. This may be advantageous in that a greater amount of substrate material is provided in the main panel 112 between the stabilisation devices M and the of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 , whereby improving the robustness and integrity of the article carrier 190 .
- FIGS. 5 A, 5 B, and 6 there is shown an alternative blank for use in the packaging system of the present disclosure.
- like numerals have, where possible, been used to denote like parts, albeit with the addition of the prefix “300” to indicate that these features belong to the third embodiment.
- the alternative embodiment shares many common features with the embodiments of FIGS. 1 to 4 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 1 to 4 will be described in any greater detail.
- FIG. 5 A there is shown a blank 310 comprising a plurality of panels 312 , 314 , 316 , 318 , 320 , including a main panel 312 for forming a lower wall or engaging panel of a carrier 390 (see FIG. 6 ).
- a first side panel 314 is hingedly connected to a first side of the main panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 313 .
- a first top or cover panel 318 is hingedly connected to the first side panel 314 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 317 .
- a second side panel 316 is hingedly connected to a second side of the main panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 315 .
- a second top or cover panel 320 is hingedly connected to the second side panel 316 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 319 .
- the main panel 312 of the blank 310 includes at least one article retention structure RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the main panel 312 comprises a plurality of article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 , specifically eight article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 arranged in 2 ⁇ 4 matrix or array.
- Each of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 comprises an opening or aperture A 1 , A 2 .
- the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 are substantially similar to those shown in FIGS. 3 and 4 and will not be described in further detail.
- the main panel 312 comprises a handle structure.
- the handle structure may comprise at least one handle opening A 3 .
- the blank 310 comprises three handle openings A 2 .
- Each handle opening A 3 is defined in or struck from a region of the main panel 312 disposed centrally between four apertures A 1 , A 2 arranged as two adjacent pairs of apertures A 1 , A 2 .
- the first and second top panels 318 , 320 are arranged to be disposed in at least partially overlapping relationship with each other.
- the overlapping portions of the first and second top panels 318 , 320 are provided with a locking structure for locking the first and second top panels 318 , 320 .
- the locking structure cooperates with the handle openings in the main panel 312 to secure the first and second top panels 318 , 320 to the main panel 312 .
- the locking structure comprises at least one receiver RC in the form of an opening in the first top panel 318 .
- the first top panel 318 comprises a plurality of openings, more specifically three openings, although in other embodiments one, two or more than three openings may be provided. Each of the openings is arranged to be in vertical registry or alignment with a handle opening A 3 provided in the main panel 312 .
- the openings may be defined by at least one tab 392 , 394 , 396 (also referred to herein as female tabs or receiver tabs). In the illustrated embodiment, the openings are defined by three tabs 392 , 394 , 396 .
- the openings may be substantially square or diamond shaped, In the illustrated embodiment, the corners of the opening are rounded or filleted.
- a first tab 396 is hinged to the first top panel 318 by a first hinged connection in the form of a first fold line 391 .
- a second tab 392 is hinged to the first top panel 318 by a second hinged connection in the form of a second fold line 393 .
- the second tab 392 is hinged to the first top panel 318 in opposition to the first tab 396 .
- the first tab 396 is separated in part from the second tab 392 by a first severance line or cut line 397 and in part by a third tab 394 .
- the third tab 394 is defined by a second severance line or cut line 399 .
- the second cut line 399 is substantially ‘U’ shaped.
- the third tab 394 is hinged to the first top panel 318 by a third hinged connection in the form of a third fold line 395 .
- the third hinged connection is disposed adjacent to the first and/or second hinged connection, and may be substantially orthogonal thereto.
- the third tab 394 defines a cut-out or recess in each of the first and second tabs 396 , 392 . The cut-out or recess is struck from a free end edge opposing the first and second hinged connections respectively.
- the locking structure comprises at least one locking element L for being received in the receiver RC.
- the locking element L comprises a tab 380 struck from the second top panel 320 , the illustrated embodiment comprises three tabs 380 each arranged to be engageable with one of the receiver openings and a respective one of the handle openings A 2 .
- Each tab 380 is hinged to the second top panel 320 by a hinged connection 381 .
- Each tab 380 may comprise at least one fold line.
- the tab 380 comprises a pair of fold lines.
- the pair of fold lines may be divergently arranged with respect to each other.
- Each of the pair of fold lines may be non-linear in shape for example but not limited to arcuate or curvilinear in shape.
- the nonlinear fold lines may encourage the tab 380 to return to a planar arrangement so as to increase security of the tab 380 within the receiver and the handle opening A 3 .
- the tab 380 may be substantially ‘arrow head’ shaped so as to define a pair of opposing shoulders or detents for securely engaging the handle opening A 3 and/or receiver RC.
- the first top panel 318 , second top panel 320 , first and second side panels 314 , 316 and main panel 312 form a tubular structure. Each end of the tubular structure is closed by an end closure structure.
- a first end closure structure comprises a first end panel 324 hingedly connected to a first end of the main panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 325 .
- a first top end flap 326 is hingedly connected to the first end panel 324 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 327 .
- a first anchor flap 322 A is hingedly connected to a first end of the first top panel 318 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 323 A.
- the first anchor flap 322 A is hingedly connected to the first top end flap 326 by a pair of hinged panels 328 A, 330 A.
- the pair of hinged panels 328 A, 330 A form a gusset.
- a first connecting panel 328 A is hingedly connected to the first anchor flap 322 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- a second connecting panel 330 A is hingedly connected to the first connecting panel 328 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- the second connecting panel 330 A is hingedly connected to the first top end flap 326 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- a second anchor flap 322 B is hingedly connected to a first end of the second top panel 320 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 323 B.
- the second anchor flap 322 B is hingedly connected to the first top end flap 326 by a pair of hinged panels 328 B, 330 B forming a second gusset.
- a third connecting panel 328 B is hingedly connected to the second anchor flap 322 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- a fourth connecting panel 330 B is hingedly connected to the third connecting panel 328 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- the fourth connecting panel 330 B is hingedly connected to the first top end flap 326 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- the first end panel 324 is separated from each of the first and second anchor flaps 322 A, 322 B by an aperture A 10 .
- the apertures A 10 separate each of the pair of hinged panels 328 A/ 330 A, 328 B/ 330 B from the respective one of the first and second side panels 314 , 316 .
- a second end closure structure comprises a second end panel 334 hingedly connected to a second end of the main panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 335 .
- a second top end flap 336 is hingedly connected to the second end panel 334 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 337 .
- a third anchor flap 332 A is hingedly connected to a second end of the first top panel 318 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 333 A.
- the third anchor flap 332 A is hingedly connected to the second top end flap 336 by a pair of hinged panels 338 A, 340 A forming a third gusset.
- a fifth connecting panel 338 A is hingedly connected to the third anchor flap 332 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- a sixth connecting panel 340 A is hingedly connected to the fifth connecting panel 338 A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- the sixth connecting panel 340 A is hingedly connected to the second top end flap 336 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- a fourth anchor flap 332 B is hingedly connected to a second end of the second top panel 320 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 333 B.
- the fourth anchor flap 332 B is hingedly connected to the second top end flap 336 by a pair of hinged panels 338 B, 340 B forming a fourth gusset.
- a seventh connecting panel 338 B is hingedly connected to the fourth anchor flap 332 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 339 B (see FIG. 5 B ).
- An eighth connecting panel 340 B is hingedly connected to the seventh connecting panel 338 B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 355 B.
- the eighth connecting panel 340 B is hingedly connected to the second top end flap 336 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 359 B.
- the second end panel 334 is separated from each of the third and fourth anchor flaps 332 A, 332 B by an aperture A 10 .
- the apertures A 10 separate each of the pair of hinged panels 338 A/ 340 A, 338 B/ 340 B from the respective one of the first and second side panels 314 , 316 .
- the blank 310 may comprise at least two alignment or registration devices W 1 , W 2 .
- Each of the registration devices W 1 , W 2 takes the form of a cutaway or recess defining a registration edge of the blank 310 for receiving or engaging a reference pin (discussed in greater detail below).
- the blank 310 comprises a pair of first registration devices W 1 each defining a downstream or leading registration edge.
- the blank 310 may also comprise a second pair of registration devices W 2 each defining an upstream or trailing registration edge.
- Each of the cutaways or recesses defining a registration device W 1 , W 2 is struck from, or defined in, one of the first and second top panels 318 , 320 .
- the blank 310 may comprise at least one stabilisation device.
- the blank 110 comprises three stabilisation devices.
- Each stabilization device comprises an opening in at least one of the first top panel 318 , second top panel 320 , and the main panel 312 .
- Each stabilization device may comprise an opening in at least two, or all, of the first top panel 318 , second top panel 320 , and the main panel 312 .
- Each stabilisation device is configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below).
- An opening forming at least part of the stabilisation device may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped.
- the opening or openings in the panels providing the stabilisation device may be defined by at least one tab struck from the panel in which it is formed and hingedly connected thereto.
- an opening is defined in part by a pair of tabs 370 , 372 each struck from the first top panel 318 and hingedly connected to the first top panel 318 in opposition to each other.
- the pair of tabs 370 , 372 may be separated from each other by a cut or severable line 377 .
- a first stabilisation device is arranged to be disposed in vertical registration with a gap or void between a first group of four articles being packaged within the carrier 390 .
- a second stabilisation device is arranged to be disposed in vertical registration with a gap or void between a second group of four articles.
- a third stabilisation device is arranged to be disposed in vertical registration with a gap or void between a third group of four articles.
- the blank 310 may be formed into an assembled carrier 390 , as shown in FIG. 6 .
- the blank 310 is applied to a group of articles B.
- the blank 310 is lowered with respect to a group of articles B.
- Each of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 of the blank 310 is aligned with a respective article B in the group. Portions of the articles B pass through the main panel 312 .
- the toothed regions of the main panel 312 about each of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 may be folded out of the plane of the main panel 312 .
- Each toothed region of the main panel 312 may be folded about one of the articles B received in the respective one of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the main panel 312 may deform about the article B for example but not limited to a shoulder portion of the article B, where the article B is a can the shoulder portion may be provide by the neck-in.
- the blank 310 may be partially folded about fold lines 313 , 315 to bring the first and second side panels 314 , 316 into non-coplanar relationship with the main panel 312 .
- the blank 310 is folded about fold lines 323 A, 323 B, 333 A, 333 B to fold the first, second, third and fourth anchor flaps 322 A, 322 B, 332 A, 332 B into substantially face to face relationship with the first or second side panels 314 , 316 to which they are hinged.
- the blank 310 is folded about fold lines 325 , 335 to fold the first and second end panels 324 , 334 into substantially at least perpendicular relationship with the main panel 312 .
- the first and second end panels 324 , 334 may be folded through an angle greater than 90° so as to be inclined.
- the blank 310 is folded about fold lines 327 , 337 to fold the first and second top end flaps 326 , 336 with respect to the respective one of the first and second end panels 324 , 334 to which they are hinged.
- the first and second top end flaps 326 , 336 may be folded over an upper end of an article B or articles B disposed adjacent to the first and second ends of the main panel 312 .
- the first and second top end flaps 326 , 336 may be folded to be substantially parallel to the main panel 312 .
- the first and second end panels 324 , 334 and first and second top end flaps 326 , 336 may be folded automatically in response to folding the first, second, third and fourth anchor flaps 322 A, 322 B, 332 A, 332 B into substantially face contacting relationship with the respective one of the first and second side panels 314 , 316 .
- the blank 310 is folded about fold lines 313 , 315 to bring the first and second side panels 314 , 316 into substantially perpendicular relationship with the main panel 312 .
- the blank 310 is folded about fold line 317 to fold the first top panel 318 over the tops of the articles B.
- the blank 310 is folded about fold line 319 to fold the second top panel 320 over the tops of the articles B and into overlapping relationship with the first top panel 318 to form a composite top panel 318 / 320 .
- the locking tabs 380 are displaced out of the plane of the second top panel 320 , downwardly so as to pass through a respective one of the receiver openings.
- the receiver tabs 392 , 394 , 396 displaced out of the plane of the first top panel 318 as a consequence.
- the locking tabs 380 are engaged with the first and second receiver tabs 396 , 392 .
- Shoulders of the locking tab 380 may engage not only with the perimeter of the respective handle opening A 3 but also with an edge of each of the first and second receiver tabs 396 , 392 .
- the shoulders of the locking tab 380 engage with an edge of each of the first and second receiver tabs 396 , 392 defined by a cutaway or recess in the free edge opposing their hinged connections 391 , 393 to the first top panel 318 .
- the recessed edges of the first and second receiver tabs 396 , 392 prevent or inhibit disengagement of the locking tabs 380 from the locked condition with the first and second receiver tabs 396 , 392 .
- the locking tabs 380 and the receiver tabs 396 , 392 may also serve to function as a spacer between the composite top panel 318 / 320 and the main panel 312 .
- the locking tabs 380 may engage the main panel 312 along the perimeters of the handle openings A 3 and/or the lower surface of the main panel 312 and may thereby serve as tension members for maintaining a spacing between the main panel 312 and the composite top panel 318 / 320 so as to prevent the spacing from increasing.
- the receiver tabs 396 , 392 and/or the locking tabs 380 may engage or abut with the inside or upper surface of the main panel 312 and may thereby brace between the composite top panel 318 / 320 and the main panel 312 to maintain a spacing therebetween so as to assist in preventing the spacing from decreasing.
- at least a portion of the locking tab 380 and/or at least a portion of one or more of the receiver tabs 396 , 392 may be disposed between the first top panel 318 and the main panel 312 to maintain a spacing therebetween.
- the locking tab 380 may also provide a cushioning tab improving comfort when the package 390 is carried by inserting one or more fingers into the openings in the composite top panel 318 / 320 and the main panel 312 .
- the first and second receiver tabs 396 , 392 when folded may extend through the handle openings A 3 .
- the locking tabs 380 may also engage with the main panel 312 , passing through a respective one of the handle openings A 3 .
- the shoulders of the locking tab 380 may engage with an underside of the main panel 312 ; the underside being a second side of the main panel 312 opposing a first side through which the locking tab 380 was received.
- the third tab 394 may provide a biasing mechanism.
- the third tab 394 has natural or inherent tendency to return to the unfolded condition. This may provide, or supplement, the resilient bias of the locking tab 380 to return to an unfolded condition.
- the third tab 394 encourages the locking tabs 380 towards an end stop defined by the recessed edge of the first and second receiver tabs 396 , 392 . The end stop inhibits or prevents the locking tab 380 from returning to the unfolded condition.
- FIGS. 7 to 12 illustrate embodiments of a packaging apparatus 400 , 500 , 600 forming part of a packaging machine for assembling the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 of FIGS. 1 to 6 about a group of articles B.
- FIGS. 7 to 10 show views of a packaging apparatus 400 adapted to assemble the blank 110 of FIG. 3 .
- FIG. 11 shows a view of a packaging apparatus 500 adapted to assemble the blank 310 of FIG. 5 .
- FIG. 12 shows a view of a packaging apparatus 600 adapted to assemble the blank 10 of FIG. 1 .
- FIG. 7 there is shown a packaging apparatus 400 comprising a grouping and metering apparatus and an applicator 420 for applying the blank 110 to a metered group of articles (not shown in FIG. 7 , FIG. 8 shows the articles B, and FIG. 9 shows the position of the articles B in phantom lines).
- the metering apparatus comprises a first plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 for engaging, metering, and driving a first column of articles B through the packaging apparatus 400 .
- the metering apparatus comprises a second plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 for engaging, metering, and driving a second column of articles B through the packaging apparatus 400 .
- the second plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 is arranged in opposition to the first plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 .
- Each of the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 is coupled to, or comprises, a drive mechanism to propel each of the first and second plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 about a respective track or loop.
- Each of the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 is coupled to, or mounted to, a track a respective track or loop (not shown) having a working reach and a return reach.
- the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 may comprise a magnet (not shown) for holding the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 to the track.
- the track comprises a drive mechanism for driving the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 about the track.
- the drive mechanism may take the form of a linear motor.
- a stator comprising coils is mounted to the track and generates propulsive force by acting upon the magnet to drive the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 about the track.
- Each of the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 can be independently or individually controlled, In this way, the pitch between article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 can be varied and the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 can be individually accelerated or decelerated.
- Each article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 in the first plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 is driven in synchronicity with a respective one of the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 in the second plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 , at least through a working reach of the packaging apparatus 400 , 500 , 600 .
- the packaging apparatus 400 may merge a first stream of articles B with a second stream of articles B, the first plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 engaging articles from the first stream and the second plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 engaging articles from the second stream.
- Each article engaging tool 432 A, 432 B, 434 comprises a carriage 448 having at least one wheel or follower 446 , in some embodiments two, three, four or more wheels or followers 446 may be provided on each carriage 448 and engage with the track.
- Each carriage 448 comprises a head 442 detachably mounted thereto by a securing mechanism 444 .
- the lock mechanism 444 may take the form of a bayonet style fitting or mount. In this way, the head 442 is readily separated from the carriage 448 and may be interchanged, swapped or replaced. This allows the head 442 to be changed for a different head to accommodate a different carton blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 or article B or to enable replacement of a damaged or broken head.
- Each of the heads 442 comprises a gripper or scoop 443 providing at least one engaging surface for engaging an article B.
- the gripper 443 comprises a pair of fingers or limbs defining a recess or channel arranged to accommodate a portion of the article B.
- Each of the heads 442 may comprise a reference pin or post 440 extending upwardly therefrom.
- the reference pin 440 is mounted to the head 442 at a first proximal end and extends upwardly to a distal free end. The distal free end is disposed at an elevation above the upper end of the articles B. In this way, the reference pin 440 is configured to engage with a blank 110 when placed upon the upper ends of the articles B in the group of articles B.
- the heads 442 forming leading and trailing article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B may comprise a first reference pin or post 440 .
- the heads 442 forming intermediate article engaging tools 434 may comprise an optional second reference pin or post 440 ′.
- the second reference pin or post 440 ′ may be offset with respect to the first reference pins 440 provided by the leading and trailing article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, best illustrated in FIG. 8 .
- the reference pin 440 is arranged to be located between a leading portion of the head 442 and a trailing portion of the head 442 .
- the reference pin 440 is located upstream of a downstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by the head 442 to which it is mounted and the reference pin 440 is located downstream of an upstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by said head 442 .
- the reference pin 440 may be disposed within the footprint of the carriage 448 and/or head 442 . In this way, two adjacent carriages 448 or head 442 can be brought into close proximity without interference by the reference pin 440 or its mounting. This enables two or more article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 to bring two or more articles B into close proximity or to engage two or more articles B which are disposed in close proximity.
- pairs of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 bring together pairs of articles B, one from each of the first and second columns or streams of articles B.
- Two or more pairs of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 may be employed to form a group of articles B, in the illustrated embodiment four pairs of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 form a group of eight articles B in a 2 ⁇ 4 matrix or array.
- the leading pair of article engaging tools 432 B may be retarded to allow the intermediate pairs of article engaging tools 434 , and the trailing pair of article engaging tools 432 A to catch up with the pair of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 disposed downstream thereof.
- the trailing pair of article engaging tools 432 A may catch up with the pair of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 disposed downstream thereof.
- they too may be retarded to match the speed of said downstream pair.
- speed of an upstream pair of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 may be increased or accelerated to catch an adjacent downstream pair of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 .
- the blank 110 is lowered or fed from above by an overhead conveyor (not shown) and is moved in the downstream direction with the articles B, the leading registration edges provided by the pair of first registration devices W 1 are brought into contact with the reference pin 440 of respective ones of the leading pair of article engaging tools 432 B.
- the reference pin 440 of respective ones of the trailing pair of article engaging tools 432 A are brought into contact with the trailing registration edges provided by the pair of second registration devices W 2 .
- the blank 110 is confined between the reference pins 440 of the leading and trailing article engaging tools 432 B, 432 A.
- the reference pins 440 ensure the blank is correctly aligned with respect to the group of article B and maintains this alignment as the blank 110 and articles B move in a downstream direction through the packaging machine.
- only one of the trailing pair of article engaging tools 432 A and one of the leading pair of article engaging tools 432 B may comprise a reference pin 440 ; said reference pins 440 being disposed on diagonally opposed ones of the trailing pair of article engaging tools 432 A and leading pair of article engaging tools 432 B.
- the reference pins 440 ′ (when provided) of the intermediate pairs of article engaging tools 434 may contact or engage side edges S 1 , S 2 of the blank 110 to further support alignment of the blank 110 with respect to the group of articles B.
- the reference pins 440 , 440 ′ each engage a panel 118 , 120 hingedly connected to the main or engaging panel 112 .
- the panel 118 , 120 is folded about a side or end of the article group, in doing so the panel 118 , 120 , in particular the registration edges, are disengaged from the reference pins 440 , 440 ′.
- the packaging apparatus 400 comprises an applicator 420 for effecting folding of the panel 118 , 120 with respect to the main or engaging panel 112 .
- the applicator 420 comprises a plate 421 , a lower or engaging surface of the plate 421 comprises a plurality of recesses or orifices each adapted to receive an upper portion of an article B.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises eight orifices arranged in 2 ⁇ 4 matrix or array.
- the plate 421 comprises one or more folding dies or brakes 452 A, 452 B depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate 421 .
- the folding dies or brakes 452 A, 452 B effect folding of the side panels 118 , 120 with respect to the main or engaging panel 112 .
- the plate 421 comprises one or more retention or stabilising pins or lugs 450 depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate 421 .
- the illustrated embodiment comprises three stabilising pins 450 , best shown in FIG. 9 .
- the stabilising pins 450 are longer in length than the folding dies 452 A, 452 B, so as to extend therebelow.
- the stabilising pins 450 are the first parts of the applicator 420 to engage the blank 110 .
- the stabilising pins 450 also referred to herein as abutment pegs, are received by a respective stabilisation device M.
- the stabilising pins 450 are inserted into the opening of the stabilisation device M, the tabs 94 when present are folded out of the plane of the main panel 112 as the stabilising pins 450 are received.
- the stabilising pins 450 prevent or inhibit movement of the blank 110 with respect to the applicator 420 and retain the blank 110 in correct alignment with the articles B as the side panels 18 , 120 are folded about the sides of the article group.
- the applicator 420 is lowered with respect to the articles B so as to press the blank 110 over the upper ends of the articles B.
- the applicator 420 is brought into contact with the blank 110 , the stabilising pins 450 are received by the stabilisation devices M, the side panels 118 , 120 are folded downwardly, applicator 420 is lowered further and presses the blank 110 downwardly such that an article B is received in each of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the tabs 140 , 142 , 144 , 154 are folded out of the plane of the engaging panel 112 and engage below a flange or other suitable projection provided on the articles B.
- FIG. 11 shows a view of a packaging apparatus 500 adapted to assemble the blank 310 of FIG. 5 .
- the packaging apparatus 500 comprises heads 542 which have been adapted to accommodate the blank 310 .
- the heads 542 comprise reference pins 540 which are disposed further from the engaging surface 543 of the head 542 than those of the head 442 of the embodiment of FIGS. 7 to 10 .
- the securing mechanism 544 is disposed between the engaging surface 543 of the head 542 and the reference pin 540 .
- the reference pin 440 is disposed between the securing mechanism 444 and the engaging surface 443 of the head 442 .
- the heads 542 of FIG. 11 and the heads 442 of FIGS. 7 to 10 may be interchangeable, that is to say the head may be selected depending upon the blank being packaged.
- the carriage 448 and the carriage 548 may be substantially similar such that either head 542 or head 442 can be mounted thereto.
- FIG. 12 there is shown a view of a packaging apparatus 600 adapted to assemble the blank 10 of FIG. 1 .
- the applicator 620 comprises a pair of first stabilising pegs or pins 650 adapted to be received in the opening of the stabilisation devices M.
- the applicator 620 comprises an optional second stabilising peg or pin 654 adapted to be received in the handle opening of the handle structure H.
- the second stabilising peg 654 is shaped and dimensioned to fit the handle opening and may be wider, or larger in diameter, than the first stabilising pegs 650 .
- the pair of first stabilising pegs or pins 650 may be omitted and only the second stabilising peg or pin 654 may be provided, the second stabilising peg or pin 654 may be shaped to prevent or inhibit rotation of the blank with respect to the applicator 620 when the second stabilising peg or pin 654 is received in a stabilising device provided by the blank 10 .
- the applicator 620 comprises one or more first folding dies or brakes depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate.
- the folding dies or brakes effect folding of the side panels 18 , 20 with respect to the main or engaging panel 12 .
- the applicator 620 comprises one or more second folding dies or brakes 652 C, 652 C depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate.
- the folding dies or brakes effect folding of the end panels 14 , 16 with respect to the main or engaging panel 12 .
- the applicator 620 is mounted to an overhead wheel which is adapted to maintain the orientation of the applicator 620 with respect to a conveyor (not shown).
- the applicator 620 is maintained substantially parallel with the conveyor, such that the engaging surface of the plate faces towards the articles B and/or conveyor throughout the rotation of the overhead wheel.
- FIGS. 13 to 19 there is shown alternative embodiments of a packaging system, article carriers and blanks, apparatus and applicators of the present disclosure.
- the alternative embodiments share many common features with the embodiments of FIGS. 1 to 12 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 1 to 12 will be described in any greater detail.
- FIG. 13 there is shown a plan view of a pair of connected blanks 401 each of which is capable of forming a carton or carrier 490 , as shown in FIG. 17 , for containing and carrying a group of primary products such as, but not limited to, bottles or cans, hereinafter referred to as articles B, as shown in FIG. 17 .
- each blank 410 A, 410 B is configured to form a carton or carrier 490 for packaging an exemplary arrangements of exemplary articles B.
- each blank 410 A, 410 B is configured to package article in a 2 ⁇ 2 matrix or array arrangement—two rows of two articles B are provided—and the articles B are beverage cans.
- the blanks 410 A, 410 B may be configured to form a carrier for packaging other types, number and size of articles and/or for packaging articles in a different arrangement or configuration.
- FIG. 13 there is shown a pair of connected blanks 401 comprising a first blank 410 A and a second blank 410 B.
- the second blank 410 B is severable or frangibly connected to the first blank 410 A by a frangible connection 413 .
- Each of the blanks 410 A, 410 B comprises a main or engaging panel 412 for forming a top wall or an engaging panel of a carrier 490 .
- the frangible connection 413 may take the form of a plurality of cutlines spaced apart to define connecting nick or bridge portions N 1 , N 2 , N 3 , N 4 therebetween.
- the bridge portions N 1 , N 2 , N 3 , N 4 couple the first blank 410 A to the second blank 410 B.
- the frangible connection 413 comprises four connecting nick or bridge portions N 1 , N 2 , N 3 , N 4 arranged in pairs N 1 /N 2 , N 3 /N 4 .
- a first pair of connecting nicks N 1 /N 2 is disposed between a first article retention structure RT in the first blank 410 A and a second article retention structure RT in the second blank 410 B.
- the second article retention structure RT is disposed adjacent to the first article retention structure RT and each lies upon a notional longitudinal line or axis x-x, the longitudinal line or axis x-x passing through the centre of each of the first and second article retention structures RT.
- the first pair of connecting nicks N 1 /N 2 are disposed on opposite sides of the longitudinal line x-x.
- the longitudinal line x-x may define or pass through a region of closest proximity between an article B received in the first blank 410 A and an article B received in the second blank 410 B.
- the frangible connection 413 comprises a second pair of connecting nicks N 3 /N 4 disposed between a third article retention structure RT in the first blank 410 A and a fourth article retention structure RT in the second blank 410 B.
- the second pair of connecting nicks N 3 /N 4 are disposed on opposing sides of a notional line (not shown) extending longitudinally of the pair of connected blanks 401 and passing through the centres of each of the third and fourth article retention structures RT.
- the main panels 412 include at least one article retention structure RT.
- the main panels 412 each comprise a plurality of article retention structures RT specifically four article retention structures RT arranged in 2 ⁇ 2 matrix or array.
- Each of the main panels 412 comprises two columns of article retention structures RT, each column comprises two article retention structures RT.
- Each of the article retention structures RT comprises an aperture A 1 .
- Each of the article retention structures RT is substantially similar in construction and will therefore be described in detail with reference to a first one of the article retention structures RT located adjacent to a first end of the second blank 410 B as shown in FIG. 13 .
- the article retention structure RT comprises an article receiving opening defined in part by an aperture A 1 .
- the article retention structure RT comprises a plurality of engaging teeth 440 disposed about the aperture A 1 .
- the plurality of teeth 440 are hinged to the main panel 412 by a fold line.
- the fold line may be defined by a plurality of cut lines 443 , 445 .
- the plurality of cut lines 443 , 445 may define or approximate a circle.
- Each of the plurality of teeth 440 comprises an engaging edge E 1 opposing a hinged edge.
- the engaging edges E 1 are defined by a linear portion of a cut line defining the aperture A 1 .
- Each engaging edge E 1 defines a part of a polygon.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises sixteen teeth 440 .
- Each tooth 440 comprises a pair of side edges, the side edges are defined by cut lines 441 extending radially outward from respective vertices of the polygon. That is to say from a respective vertex between a pair of adjacent linear portions of the cut line defining the aperture A 1 .
- the cut lines 441 are divergently arranged with respect to each other and define an angle therebetween, the angle may be about 22.5°.
- the article retention structure RT may comprise a plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 is aligned with one of the radial cut lines 441 such that said one of the radial cut lines 441 or a notional extension thereof bisects a respective one of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 is spaced apart from said one of the radial cut lines 441 bisecting it so as to define a connecting nick or bridge portion between a pair of adjacently disposed teeth 440 .
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 may be linear in shape.
- the article retention structure RT may comprise a plurality of second circumferential cut lines 445 .
- Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 445 is disposed between a pair of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 and is spaced apart therefrom so as to define a pair of connecting nick or bridge portions between each tooth 440 and the main panel 412 .
- the pair of connecting nick or bridge portions provide a hinged or foldable connection between each tooth 440 and the main panel 412 .
- Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 445 may be linear in shape. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 may be arcuate or curved. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 445 may be arcuate or curved.
- the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 445 is equal to the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443 however in other embodiments it may be different.
- the blanks 410 A, 410 B comprise a handle structure H.
- the handle structure H comprises a handle or finger opening disposed on a longitudinal axis bisecting the main panel 412 .
- the handle opening is provided between a group of four article retention structures RT.
- the handle opening is provided centrally or medially of the main panel 412 .
- Each handle opening is defined by a plurality of tabs 460 , 462 .
- the handle openings comprise four tabs 460 , 462 .
- Each tab 460 , 462 is hinged to the main panel 412 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line.
- An arcuate or curvilinear cut line may be provided between each fold line to define a corner or vertex of the handle opening.
- the handle openings are substantially rhombus or diamond shaped, in other embodiments other shapes may be employed such as, but not limited to square.
- the handle openings comprise a pair of major tabs 460 and a pair of minor tabs 462 .
- the pair of major tabs 460 are separated from each other by a first cut line or severable line.
- the pair of minor tabs 462 are separated from each other by the first cut line or severable line.
- the pair of major tabs 460 are separated from the pair of minor tabs 462 by a second cut line or severable line.
- the first cut line is colinear with a notional line passing longitudinally though the centre of the group of four article retention structures RT.
- the first cut line may be linear in shape and may extend between a first pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening.
- the second cut line may be non-linear in shape and may extend between a second pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening.
- the second cut line intersects the first cutline, the second cut line comprises a “V” or “U” shaped medial portion; a vertex of the “V” or “U” shaped portion intersects the first cutline.
- One of the pair of major tabs 460 is hinged to the main panel 412 by a first fold line.
- the other one of the pair of major tabs 460 is hinged to the main panel 412 by a second fold line.
- the first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the second fold line.
- One of the pair of minor tabs 462 is hinged to the main panel 412 by a third fold line.
- the other one of the pair of minor tabs 462 is hinged to the main panel 412 by a fourth fold line.
- the third fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line.
- the first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the third fold line.
- the second fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line.
- the handle openings may form a stabilisation device during application of the blanks 410 A, 410 B to a group of articles B.
- the stabilisation devices are configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below).
- the opening of the stabilisation devices may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped.
- a peg or dog may be provided for engaging the blanks 410 A, 410 B via the handle opening to prevent or inhibit linear or rotation movement of the blanks 410 A, 410 B with respect to the dog.
- the dog may be mounted to, or integral with, an applicator device, described in more detail below, for applying the blanks 410 A, 410 B to a group of articles B.
- the opening of the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one flat or linear portion for engaging a complementary flat or linear portion of the dog.
- the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one generally “V” or “U” shaped portion for engaging a complementary portion of the dog.
- the blanks 410 A, 410 B are applied simultaneously to a pair of article groups.
- the main panels 412 of each blank 410 A, 410 B is applied to one of the groups of articles B.
- the pair of connected blanks 401 is lowered with respect to the articles B to be at rest thereupon as shown in FIG. 14 .
- An applicator device AP is provided to engage the blanks 410 A, 410 B with the articles B.
- the applicator device AP comprises a plate or body 450 from which a plurality of guides G may extend.
- the guides G depend downwardly from the plate 450 and ensure the articles B are maintained in the desired configuration or arrangement to be received by the blanks 410 A, 410 B.
- the guides may also ensure or retain the pair of connected blanks 401 in alignment with the groups of articles B.
- the guides G take the form of a plurality of fingers or elongate members however in other embodiments the guides may take the form of vertical walls depending downwardly from the plate 450 so as to surround at least an upper portion of the pair of article groups.
- the applicator device AP comprises a pair of posts P 1 , P 2 forming retention or stabilising pins or lugs depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate 450 .
- the illustrated embodiment comprises two stabilising pins, best shown in FIG. 14 .
- a portion of the applicator device AP has been cutaway, as indicated by hatching, for illustrative purposes.
- a first post P 1 engages the stabilisation device provided by the handle opening of the first blank 410 A.
- a second post P 2 engages the stabilisation device provided by the handle opening of the second blank 410 B, best shown in FIG. 15 .
- the tabs 460 , 462 of the handle structures H are folded out of the plane of the main panels 412 as the stabilising pins are received.
- a disconnecting device BL depends from a lower surface of the plate 450 , the disconnecting device BL may take the form of a blade mounted substantially perpendicularly with respect to the lower surface of the plate 450 .
- the disconnecting device BL extends transversely across the plate 450 .
- the disconnecting device BL severs or cleaves the connecting nicks or bridge portions N 1 , N 2 , N 3 , N 4 thereby separating the first and second blanks 410 A, 410 B from each other.
- the lower or engaging surface of the plate 450 comprises a plurality of recesses or orifices OR each adapted to receive an upper portion of an article B.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises eight orifices OR arranged in 2 ⁇ 4 matrix or array.
- the orifices OR may be at least partially blind, that is to say they comprise an end stop ES preventing the articles B from passing through the plate 450 .
- the stabilising pins are now fully inserted into the stabilisation devices so as to prevent or inhibit movement of the pair of blanks 410 A, 410 B with respect to the applicator AP and retain each blank 410 A, 410 B in correct alignment with the articles B.
- the applicator AP is lowered still further with respect to the articles B so as to press the blanks 410 A, 410 B over the upper ends of the articles B.
- the applicator AP presses the blanks 410 A, 410 B downwardly such that an article B is received in each of the article retention structures RT.
- the tabs 440 are folded out of the plane of the engaging panels 412 and engage below a flange or other suitable projection provided on the articles B, best shown in FIG. 17 to form packages.
- the applicator AP is raised with respect to the packages, the assembled packages may be conveyed to further processing stations or to a point of sale.
- FIG. 18 illustrates a number of alternative blade configurations BL 1 , BL 2 , BL 3 , BL 4 , BL 5 .
- a first blade BL 1 comprises a single breaking edge CE which is parallel to a mounting edge ME. The entirety of the breaking edge CE engages the frangible connection simultaneously when in use.
- a second blade BL 2 comprises a pair of breaking edges CE 1 , CE 2 arranged divergently with respect each other to form a point or vertex.
- Each of the pair of breaking edges CE 1 , CE 2 is non-parallel, or divergently arranged, with respect to a mounting edge ME.
- a third blade BL 3 is shown in FIG. 18 , the third blade BL 3 is substantially similar to the second blade BL 2 albeit the pair of breaking edges CE 1 , CE 2 are arranged such that a smaller internal angle is defined therebetween.
- a fourth blade BL 4 is shown in FIG. 18 , the fourth blade BL 4 is substantially similar to the second and third blades BL 2 , BL 3 albeit the pair of breaking edges CE 1 , CE 2 are arranged such that a smaller internal angle is defined therebetween.
- each of the pair of breaking edges CE 1 , CE 2 comprises a marginal portion arranged substantially parallel with the mounting edge ME.
- a fifth blade BL 5 is shown in FIG. 18 , the fifth blade BL 5 comprises a recess, scalloped or serrated breaking edge.
- the fifth blade BL 5 comprises four divergently arranged breaking edges CE 1 , CE 2 , CE 3 , CE 4 .
- a first breaking edge CE 1 and a second breaking edge CE 2 are divergently arranged with respect each other to form a point or vertex substantially at a centre or medial region of the fifth blade BL 5 .
- Third and fourth breaking edges CE 3 , CE 4 are provided at marginal regions of the fifth blade BL 5 .
- the third breaking edge CE 3 is divergently arranged with respect to the first breaking edge CE 1 to define a recess R therebetween.
- the fourth breaking edge CE 4 is divergently arranged with respect to the second breaking edge CE 2 to define a recess R therebetween.
- the third breaking edge CE 3 may be arranged to be parallel to the second breaking edge CE 2 .
- the fourth breaking edge CE 4 may be arranged to be parallel to the first breaking edge CE 1 .
- the fifth blade BL 5 may be considered to have a plurality of breaking edges or blades CE 1 , CE 2 , CE 3 , CE 4 mounted to a common base or mounting body.
- the fifth blade BL 5 may be advantageous when separating a pair of blanks 410 A, 410 B in which the articles B in a first group being engaged by the first blank 410 A are in contact or close proximity to the articles B in a second group being engaged by the second blank 410 B.
- the recesses R avoid a region of contact or close proximity between pairs or cylindrical articles B. In this way, the fifth blade BL 5 avoids contact or impact with the articles B.
- the packaging apparatus configured to automate application of the pair of connected blanks 401 to groups of articles B.
- the packaging apparatus comprises a plurality of tool heads 702 mounted to an overhead wheel arrangement 754 .
- the overhead wheel arrangement 754 is adapted to maintain the orientation of an applicator 720 with respect to a conveyor 753 .
- the applicator 720 is shown in a cutaway view, as indicated by hatching, for illustrative purposes to illustrate posts P 1 , P 2 mounted thereto.
- the applicator 720 is maintained substantially parallel with the conveyor 753 , such that the engaging surface of the plate 450 faces towards the articles B and/or conveyor throughout the rotation of the overhead wheel.
- the applicator 720 is moveably mounted to the tool head 702 , and is resiliently biased towards the conveyor 753 by spring mounts 758 depending from a mounting plate 756 .
- the applicator 720 differs from that shown in FIGS. 13 to 17 in that the guides G have been omitted, instead the pair of connected blanks 401 are aligned with respect to the articles B by reference posts 740 mounted to article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 .
- the packaging apparatus comprises a grouping and metering apparatus and an overhead applicator for applying the pair of connected blanks 410 to metered groups of articles B.
- the metering apparatus comprises a first plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 for engaging, metering, and driving a first column of articles B through the packaging apparatus.
- the metering apparatus comprises a second plurality of article engaging tools (not illustrated in FIG. 19 ), configured in a similar manner to those shown in the embodiments of FIGS. 7 to 11 for engaging, metering, and driving a second column of articles B through the packaging apparatus.
- the second plurality of article engaging tools is arranged in opposition to the first plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 .
- Each of the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 is coupled to, or comprises, a drive mechanism to propel each of the first and second plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 about a respective track or loop.
- Each of the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 is coupled to, or mounted to, a track a respective track or loop (not shown) having a working reach and a return reach.
- the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 may comprise a magnet (not shown) for holding the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 to the track.
- the track comprises a drive mechanism for driving the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 about the track.
- the drive mechanism may take the form of a linear motor.
- a stator comprising coils is mounted to the track and generates propulsive force by acting upon the magnet to drive the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 about the track.
- Each of the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 can be independently or individually controlled, In this way, the pitch between article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 can be varied and the article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 can be individually accelerated or decelerated.
- Each article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 in the first plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 is driven in synchronicity with a respective one of the article engaging tools in the second plurality of article engaging tools, at least through a working reach of the packaging apparatus.
- the packaging apparatus may merge a first stream of articles B with a second stream of articles B, the first plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 engaging articles from the first stream and the second plurality of article engaging tools engaging articles from the second stream.
- Each article engaging tool 732 A, 732 B, 734 comprises a carriage having at least one wheel or follower 746 , in some embodiments two, three, four or more wheels or followers 746 may be provided on each carriage and engage with the track.
- Each carriage comprises a head detachably mounted thereto by a securing mechanism.
- the lock mechanism may take the form of a bayonet style fitting or mount. In this way, the head is readily separated from the carriage and may be interchanged, swapped or replaced. This allows the head to be changed for a different head to accommodate a different carton blank or article B or to enable replacement of a damaged or broken head.
- Each of the heads comprises a gripper or scoop providing at least one engaging surface for engaging an article B.
- the gripper comprises a pair of fingers or limbs defining a recess or channel arranged to accommodate a portion of the article B.
- Each of the heads may comprise a reference pin or post 740 extending upwardly therefrom.
- the reference pin 740 is mounted to the head at a first proximal end and extends upwardly to a distal free end. The distal free end is disposed at an elevation above the upper end of the articles B. In this way, the reference pin 740 is configured to engage with the pair of connected blanks 401 when placed upon the upper ends of the articles B in the groups of articles B.
- the heads forming leading and trailing article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B may comprise a first reference pin or post 740 .
- the heads forming intermediate article engaging tools 734 may comprise an optional second reference pin or post.
- the second reference pin or post may be offset, in a direction transverse to the article flow direction F, with respect to the first reference pins 740 provided by the leading and trailing article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B.
- the reference pin 740 is arranged to be located between a leading portion of the head and a trailing portion of the head.
- the reference pin 740 is located upstream of a downstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by the head to which it is mounted and the reference pin 740 is located downstream of an upstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by said head.
- the reference pin 740 may be disposed within the footprint of the carriage and/or head. In this way, two adjacent carriages or head can be brought into close proximity without interference by the reference pin 740 or its mounting. This enables two or more article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 to bring two or more articles B into close proximity or to engage two or more articles B which are disposed in close proximity.
- pairs of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 bring together pairs of articles B, one from each of the first and second columns or streams of articles B.
- Two or more pairs of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 may be employed to form a at least two groups of articles B, in the illustrated embodiment, four pairs of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 form two groups of four articles B each in a 2 ⁇ 2 matrix or array.
- the leading pair of article engaging tools 732 B may be retarded to allow the intermediate pairs of article engaging tools 734 , and the trailing pair of article engaging tools 732 A to catch up with the pair of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 disposed downstream thereof.
- at least a first pair of intermediate article engaging tools 734 catches up with the leading pair of article engaging tools 732 B
- at least a second pair of intermediate article engaging tools 734 follows a predefined distance behind the at least first pair of intermediate article engaging tools 734
- the trailing pair of article engaging tools 732 A catches up with the at least second pair of intermediate article engaging tools 734 .
- each upstream pair of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 catch the adjacent downstream pair of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 , they too may be retarded to match the speed of said downstream pair.
- speed of an upstream pair of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 may be increased or accelerated to catch an adjacent downstream pair of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 .
- the connected blanks 401 are lowered onto the upper ends of the articles B forming the groups.
- the overhead wheel arrangement brings the applicator 720 into contact with the connected blanks 401 substantially similarly to the applicator AP of FIG. 14 to 17 to applying the blanks 410 A, 410 B to the articles B.
- FIGS. 20 to 24 there is shown a packaging apparatus 800 , best shown in FIG. 24 , configured to automate separation of a pair of connected article carriers 491 .
- a pair of connected blanks 401 such as those illustrated in FIG. 13 and described above have been applied to a plurality of groups of articles B to from the connected article carriers 491 at a previous station (not shown) of a packaging machine; the previous station may be similar in configuration to the apparatus of FIG. 12 and described above albeit with omission of the second stabilising peg or pin 654 , the folding dies or brakes may be omitted or replaced with alignment guides.
- the packaging apparatus 800 comprises at least one tool head 802 mounted to an overhead conveyor arrangement 854 disposed over an article conveyor (not shown).
- the tool heads 802 are arranged to move in synchronicity with the article conveyor over a working reach of the overhead conveyor arrangement 854 .
- the connected article carriers 491 are transferred downstream, indicated by direction arrow F, upon the article conveyor.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises a plurality of tool head 802 mounted to a track 803 and driven thereabout by a drive mechanism.
- the drive mechanism may take the form of a chain or belt arranged as an endless loop.
- each tool head 802 may be independently driven about the track 803 , each tool head 802 may comprise a drive motor or the drive mechanism may take the form of a linear motor similar to that described above in relation to the article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 of FIG. 7 .
- Each tool head 802 comprises a chassis or carriage coupling a separator SP to the track 803 .
- the separator SP comprises a plate or frame 850 from which a pair of guides G depends.
- the pair of guides G are spaced apart from each other and arranged in opposition to each other.
- the guides G engage with opposing side of the connected article carriers 491 .
- the guides G prevent or inhibit movement of the connected article carriers 491 in a direction transverse to the flow direction F.
- portions of the separator SP have been cutaway or removed for illustrative purposes and only one guide G is shown.
- the separator SP comprises at least one at least one stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 depending from the plate 850 .
- the illustrated embodiment comprises a pair of stabilisation pegs P 1 , P 2 depending from the plate 850 .
- Each of the pair of stabilisation pegs P 1 , P 2 engages with a respective one of the connected article carriers 491 .
- Each stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 is received in a handle or finger opening provided in the main panel 412 of each connected article carriers 491 .
- the stabilisation pegs P 1 , P 2 prevent or prevent or inhibit movement of the connected article carriers 491 whilst the separator SP divides the connected article carriers 491 into individual, discrete, disconnected, article carriers 491 .
- Each stabilisation pegs P 1 , P 2 comprises a fixture 811 mounting the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 to the plate 850 .
- the fixture 811 is received in a mounting orifice M A1 , M A2 provided in a lower or inner surface of the plate 850 .
- the mounting orifice M A1 , M A2 and the fixture 811 may be shaped as to be coded or keyed to a specific mounting location or orientation. That is to say first post P 1 is shaped to be mounted in first mounting orifice M A1 and second post P 1 is shaped to be mounted in second mounting orifice M A2 ; or each post P 1 , P 2 is mounted in a predefined orientation with respect to the plate 850 .
- the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 may be detachably or removably mounted to the applicator AP; 720 .
- An aperture R A1 , R A2 may be provided in an upper or outer surface of the plate 850 , the aperture R A1 , R A2 is in vertical registry with a respective one of the mounting orifices M A1 , M A2 .
- the aperture R A1 , R A2 may be provided to secure the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 to the plate 850 enabling a fastener, such as, but not limited to a screw or bolt to pass through the plate 850 and in to the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 .
- the aperture R A1 , R A2 may be provided to facilitate removal or replacement of the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 enabling a tool to be inserted through the plate 850 and providing access to the fixture 811 to press or push the fixture 811 of the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 out of the mounting orifice M A1 , M A2 , this may be advantageous when the fixture 811 is keyed and cannot be rotated within the mounting orifice M A1 , M A2 .
- the separator SP comprises at least one disconnecting or separating device BL.
- the at least one disconnecting or separating device BL may comprise one or more blades BL 1 , BL 2 , BL 3 , BL 4 arranged to avoid collision with the articles being packaged.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises a pair of disconnecting or separating devices BL each comprising a pair of blades BL 1 /BL 2 , BL 3 /BL 4 best shown in FIG. 21 .
- a recess BLR separates a first blade BL 1 , BL 3 from a second blade BL 2 , BL 4 in each of the pairs of blades BL 1 /BL 2 , BL 3 /BL 4 .
- the recess is configured and arranged to avoid collision of the separating devices BL with the articles B in the article carriers 490 .
- Each blade BL 1 , BL 2 , BL 3 , BL 4 is mounted to or integral with a bracket mounted to the plate 850 .
- the bracket comprises a base or mounting foot 808 and a leg 807 extending therefrom, the leg may be arranged to substantially perpendicular to the base 80 and to the plate 850 .
- the base 808 may be mounted within a recess or channel in a lower surface of the plate 850 .
- the blades BL 1 , BL 2 , BL 3 , BL 4 and support bracket may be integral with the plate 850 .
- FIG. 24 illustrates the separator SP being lowered with respect to the connected article carriers 491 and brought into contact or engagement with the connected article carriers 491 , the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 being received in the handle openings and the separator device BL breaking the connection 413 between the article carrier 490 .
- the separator SP is subsequently raised (not shown) with respect to the article carriers 490 , the tool heads 802 are return to the start of the working reach of the apparatus 800 to separate a subsequent group of connected article carriers 491 .
- FIGS. 25 and 26 there is shown a packaging apparatus 1400 for use in the packaging system of the present disclosure.
- like numerals have, where possible, been used to denote like parts, albeit with the addition of the prefix “1000”.
- the alternative embodiment shares many common features with the embodiment of FIGS. 7 to 12 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 12 will be described in any greater detail.
- FIGS. 25 and 26 illustrate an embodiment of a packaging apparatus 1400 forming part of a packaging machine for assembling the blanks 401 of FIG. 13 about a groups of articles B.
- the packaging apparatus 1400 may be adapted to package alternative blanks for example but not limited to the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 shown in FIGS. 1 to 6 .
- the packaging apparatus 1400 comprises a grouping and metering apparatus and an applicator 420 (see FIG. 26 ) for applying the blanks 401 to a metered group of articles (not shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 ).
- the metering apparatus comprises a first plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B for engaging, metering, and driving a first column of articles through the packaging apparatus 1400 .
- the metering apparatus comprises a second plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B for engaging, metering, and driving a second column of articles through the packaging apparatus 1400 .
- the second plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B is arranged in opposition to the first plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B.
- Each of the article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B is coupled to, or comprises, a drive mechanism to propel each of the first and second plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B about a respective track or loop.
- Each of the article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B is coupled to, or mounted to, a track a respective track or loop (not shown) having a working reach and a return reach.
- Each of the article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B can be independently or individually controlled. In this way, the pitch between article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B can be varied and the article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B can be individually accelerated or decelerated.
- Each article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B in the first plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B is driven in synchronicity with a respective one of the article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B in the second plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B, at least through a working reach of the packaging apparatus 1400 .
- Each article engaging tool 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B is mounted to, or comprises, a carriage (not shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 , but substantially similar to the carriages 448 of FIGS. 7 to 12 ).
- Each article engaging tool 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B comprises a head 1442 detachably mounted to the carriage by a securing mechanism 1444 , part of which is shown in FIGS. 25 and 26 .
- the lock mechanism 1444 may take the form of a bayonet style fitting or mount. In this way, the head 1442 is readily separated from the carriage and may be interchanged, swapped or replaced. This allows the head 1442 to be changed for a different or replacement head 1442 .
- Each of the heads 1442 comprises a gripper or scoop 1443 providing at least one engaging surface for engaging an article.
- the gripper 1443 comprises a pair of fingers or limbs defining a recess or channel arranged to accommodate a portion of the article.
- Each of the heads 1442 may comprise at least one pin or post 1440 extending upwardly therefrom.
- the pin 1440 is mounted to the head 442 at a first proximal end and extends upwardly to a distal free end. The distal free end is disposed at an elevation above the upper end of the articles. In this way, the pin 1440 is configured to engage with blanks 401 when placed upon the upper ends of the articles in the groups of articles.
- the pin 1440 comprise a head H 1 , H 2 , H 3 .
- the head H 1 , H 2 , H 3 may be integral with the pin 1440 , or may be mounted thereto by a suitable mounting mechanism such as but not limited to a screw thread device.
- the leading and trailing article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B may comprise a first pin 1440 having a first reference head H 1 and a second pin 1440 having a second reference head H 2 .
- the first reference head H 1 comprises a tapered or generally cone shaped upper end C o , an upper end of the cone may be truncated.
- the tapered shaped may facilitate alignment of the blanks 401 with respect to the article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B and hence with respect to the articles.
- the first reference head H 1 may comprise a main body M b disposed between the tapered upper end C o and the pin 1440 .
- the main body M b may be generally cylindrical in shape and may be larger in diameter than the pin 1440 .
- an inclined or tapered transition region may be provided between the main body M b and the pin 1440 , this may prevent or inhibit snagging, or catching, of the blanks 401 on the first reference head H 1 .
- the first reference head H 1 is configured to engage a side edge of the blanks 401 to align the blanks 401 in direction transverse to the direction of travel F.
- the second reference head H 2 is substantially similar in construction to the first reference head H 1 albeit with the addition of an annular or disc shaped protrusion forming a flange 1449 between the main body M b and the pin 1440 .
- the flange 1449 provides an upward facing ledge upon which one of the blanks 401 may rest.
- the second reference head H 2 is arranged such that the flange 1449 is below a corner region of the blanks 401 .
- the blanks 401 comprise rounded, filleted, or chamfered corners at each end thereof, the flange 1449 is disposed below the filleted endmost corners so as to support or engage a corner of one of the blanks 401 when applied to the articles by the applicator 420 .
- the flange 1449 prevents or inhibits undesirable deformation or creasing of the blanks 401 during application to the articles.
- a lower surface of the flange 1449 may be inclined or tapered to provide a transition region between the flange 1449 and the pin 1440 , this may prevent or inhibit snagging, or catching, of the blanks 401 on the second reference head H 2 .
- the second reference head H 2 is configured to engage rounded, filleted, or chamfered corners at each end of the pair of blanks 410 A, 410 B to align the blanks 401 in direction transverse and or parallel to the direction of travel F with respect to the articles.
- the heads 1442 forming intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B may comprise an optional third pin or post 1440 .
- the third pin or post 1440 comprises a third head H 3 .
- a leading or downstream one 1434 B of the intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B comprises a pin 1440 having a third head H 3 mounted to a trailing region of the gripper or scoop 1443 .
- a trailing or upstream one 1434 A of the intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B comprises a pin 1440 having a third head H 3 mounted to a leading region of the gripper or scoop 1443 ; In this way, the trailing intermediate article engaging tool 1434 A is a mirror image of the leading intermediate article engaging tool 1434 B.
- the third pins or posts 1440 are mounted to primary or inner pin mounts of the head 1442 .
- the intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B may comprise optional pin mounts P M (also referred to herein as outer pin mounts P M ), the pin mounts P M are adapted to receive a pin 1440 which may have one of the heads H 1 , H 2 , H 3 mounted thereto.
- the outer pin mounts P M are arranged such that when mounted thereto the pins 1440 are laterally offset with respect to the first and second pins 1440 of the leading and trailing article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B.
- the outer pin mounts P M are arranged to be laterally offset with respect to the primary or inner pin mounts of the intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B.
- the optional pin mounts P M are offset in a direction transverse to the direction of travel F.
- the pins 1440 when mounted to the optional pin mount P M of an intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B in the first plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B and to the optional pin mount P M of an intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B in the second plurality of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B are spaced apart by a distance which is greater than when the third pins are mounted to the primary or inner pin mounts of the intermediate article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B.
- Third pins 1440 may be mounted in the optional pin mounts P M instead or in addition to the primary or inner pin mounts of the head 1442 .
- the optional pin mounts P M may be employed when applying blanks of alternative carriers to at least one article group.
- the third head H 3 comprises, or takes the form of, a disc or platform 1447 mounted to the upper end of the pin 1440 to provide a support surface for engaging a portion of one of the blanks 401 .
- the blanks 401 comprise rounded, filleted, or chamfered corners at or proximate a frangible connection 413 between a pair of blanks 410 A, 410 B, a platform 1447 is disposed below the filleted inner corner of each blank 410 A, 410 B so as to support or engage the corners of each of the pair of blanks 410 A, 410 B when applied to the articles by the applicator 420 .
- the platform 1447 prevents or inhibits undesirable deformation or creasing of the blanks 401 during application to the articles.
- pairs of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B bring together pairs of articles, one from each of the first and second columns or streams of articles B.
- Two or more pairs of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B may be employed to form a group of articles, in the illustrated embodiment four pairs of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B form two groups each of four articles in a 2 ⁇ 2 matrix or array.
- the leading pair of article engaging tools 1432 B may be retarded to allow the intermediate pairs of article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B, and the trailing pair of article engaging tools 1432 A to catch up with the pair of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B disposed downstream thereof.
- the leading pair of article engaging tools 1432 B may be retarded to allow the intermediate pairs of article engaging tools 1434 A, 1434 B, and the trailing pair of article engaging tools 1432 A to catch up with the pair of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B disposed downstream thereof.
- speed of an upstream pair of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B may be increased or accelerated to catch an adjacent downstream pair of article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B.
- the blanks 401 are lowered or fed from above by an overhead conveyor (not shown) and are moved in the downstream direction with the articles, leading registration edges provided by the pair of leading corners of the leading blank 410 A, are brought into contact with the reference body M b of the second head H 2 mounted to the leading pins 1440 of respective ones of the leading pair of article engaging tools 1432 B.
- the reference body M b of the second head H 2 mounted to each of the trailing pins 1440 of the trailing pair of article engaging tools 1432 A is brought into contact with a respective one of the trailing registration edges provided by the pair of trailing corners of the trailing blank 410 B.
- the blanks 401 are confined between the first and second heads H 1 , H 2 of the leading and trailing article engaging tools 1432 B, 1432 A.
- the first and second heads H 1 , H 2 ensure the blank is correctly aligned with respect to the group of articles and maintains this alignment as the blanks 401 , and articles, move in a downstream direction through the packaging machine.
- the packaging apparatus 1400 comprises an applicator 420 for effecting application of the main or engaging panel 412 of the blanks 401 to the articles.
- the applicator 420 comprises a plate 421 (see FIG. 26 ), a lower or engaging surface of the plate 421 comprises a plurality of recesses or orifices each adapted to receive an upper portion of an article.
- the illustrated embodiment comprises eight orifices arranged in 2 ⁇ 4 matrix or array.
- the plate 421 may comprises one or more retention or stabilising pins or lugs (not shown in FIG. 26 ) depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate 421 .
- the applicator 420 is lowered with respect to the articles so as to press the blanks 401 over the upper ends of the articles.
- the applicator 420 is brought into contact with the blanks 401 , the stabilising pins 450 , when present, are received by the stabilisation devices in the blanks 410 A, 410 B.
- the blanks 401 are pressed downwardly such that an article is received in each of the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 .
- the tabs 440 are folded out of the plane of the engaging panel 412 and engage below a flange or other suitable projection provided on the articles.
- the applicator 420 may comprise at least one blade or separation device for separating the pair of blanks 410 A, 410 B from each other during or after application to the articles.
- the corners, or target regions, of the blanks 410 A, 410 B may be brought into contact with the support surfaces of the platform 1447 and flange 1449 when the blanks 401 are applied to the articles by the applicator.
- the support surfaces prevent or inhibit deformation, or creasing, of the blanks 410 A, 410 B in the corner regions.
- the support surfaces prevent or inhibit the corners, or target regions, being lowered, or displaced, beyond a predefined height set or determined by the support surfaces.
- the pins 1440 and/or the heads H 1 , H 2 , H 3 may be resiliently biased in an upward or vertical direction.
- the pins 1440 and/or heads H 1 , H 2 , H 3 may move downwardly when the applicator presses the blanks 401 onto the articles.
- the support surfaces provided by the flange 1449 and platform 1447 can be disposed in contact with the lower surface of the of the blanks 401 prior to application of the blanks 401 onto the articles by the applicator 420 , that is to say prior to engagement of the articles in the article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 , and may remain in contact with said lower surface of the blanks 401 during the application or engagement phase.
- a detent or other catch may be provided to prevent upward movement of the pins 1440 or head H 1 , H 2 , H 3 once the applicator 420 is disengaged, the detent or catch may be released once the article engaging tools 1432 A, 1432 B, 1434 A, 1434 B disengage the articles, for example, but not limited to, whilst being conveyed upon the return reach of the track.
- the present disclosure provides a carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 ; 490 of the top engaging type having article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 for engaging articles B and a blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B for forming the article carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 ; 490 .
- the carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 ; 490 comprises a main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 having one or more article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 for receiving and securing the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 to a respective article B.
- the carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 may comprise a pair of opposing side panels 18 , 20 ; 118 , 120 ; 314 , 316 hingedly connected to the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 by a hinged connection.
- the carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 may comprise a pair of opposing end panels 14 , 16 ; 114 A, 114 B, 116 A, 116 B; 324 , 334 hingedly connected to the main or engaging panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 by a hinged connection.
- the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B comprises a peripheral edge a portion of which may provide at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device or pin 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 .
- the carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 may comprise a panel 18 , 20 ; 118 , 120 ; 318 , 320 hinged to the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 , the panel 18 , 20 ; 118 , 120 ; 318 , 320 comprising a registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions.
- the carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 may comprise a pair of panels 18 , 20 ; 118 , 120 ; 318 , 320 hinged to the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 on opposing sides thereof, the pair of panels 18 , 20 ; 118 , 120 ; 318 , 320 each comprise a registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions.
- a linear notional line N 1 , N 2 passing through the registration edge in each of pair of panels 18 , 20 ; 118 , 120 ; 318 , 320 passes through an opening in the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 defined by article retention structures RT 1 , RT 2 provided therein.
- the main or engaging panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 may comprise at least one stabilisation device M providing an opening in the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 and arranged to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions.
- the present disclosure provides an apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier 90 ; 190 ; 390 ; 490 .
- the apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 comprises an article engaging tool 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 for engaging an article B and conveying the article B in a downstream direction.
- the article engaging tool 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 comprises a reference device, in the form of an abutment pin or peg 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 for aligning a blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B with respect to the articles B.
- the abutment pin or peg 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 may comprise a head H 1 , H 2 , H 3 .
- the head H 1 , H 2 may provide a reference body M b .
- the reference body M b provides a wall for engaging an edge of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B.
- the wall may be a cylindrical wall.
- An upper end of the head may be tapered to provide an inclined or conical surface for aligning the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B with the reference body M b .
- the head H 2 , H 3 may provide a support surface for preventing, inhibiting or reducing undesired deformation or creasing of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B in a target region thereof.
- the head H 2 may comprise a reference body M b mounted, or extending from, the support surface.
- the article engaging tool 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 may comprise a removable head 442 ; 542 to which the reference device is mounted.
- the head 442 ; 542 may comprise part of a tool-less attachment or mounting system, such as, but not limited to, a bayonet fitting.
- the apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 may comprise a plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 each for engaging a respective article B, metering and grouping the articles B and conveying said articles B in a downstream direction as a metered group.
- Each of the plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 is driven independently about an endless track having a working reach and a return reach.
- the plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 may be configured to form a metered group of articles B and align a blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B therewith.
- the articles B may be formed into the metered group and simultaneously aligned with a blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B as it is fed onto the upper ends of the articles B.
- the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B may be brought into contact or alignment with an abutment pin 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 mounted to a leading or downstream one of the plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 forming the article group.
- the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B may be brought into contact or alignment with an abutment pin 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 mounted to each of a pair of leading or downstream one of the plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 forming the article group.
- At least one abutment pin 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 mounted to a trailing or upstream one of the plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 forming the article group may be brought into contact with the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B as the formation of the article group is completed.
- the abutment pin 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 may be shaped to provide at least two points of contact with the registration edge to inhibit movement of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B parallel with the direction of flow of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B through the apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 and perpendicularly or laterally with respect to the direction of flow of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B through the apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 .
- the apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 may comprise an applicator 420 ; 520 ; 620 ; 720 ; AP for pressing the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B onto the group of articles B.
- the applicator 420 ; 520 ; 620 ; 720 ; AP may comprise a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article B of the group.
- the applicator 420 ; 520 ; 620 ; 720 ; AP comprises at least one stabilisation peg 450 ; 650 , 654 ; P 1 , P 2 receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device M provided in the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 .
- the at least one stabilisation peg 450 ; 650 , 654 ; P 1 , P 2 constrains movement of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B with respect to the applicator 420 ; 520 ; 620 ; 720 ; AP.
- the at least one stabilisation peg 450 ; 650 , 654 ; P 1 , P 2 prevents or inhibits movement of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B with respect to the articles B in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B through the apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B through the apparatus 400 ; 500 ; 600 ; 700 .
- the applicator 420 ; 520 ; 620 ; 720 ; AP is mounted to an overhead conveyor, in the form of a wheel, which applies or engages the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B with the group of articles B as it is conveyed downstream by the plurality of article engaging tools 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 .
- the applicator 420 ; 520 ; 620 ; 720 ; AP may comprise one or more folding dies or brakes each folding a panel hinged to the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 at least partially about the group of articles B, said panel may comprise the registration edge.
- one or more panels of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B may be brought into contact with a static folding guide while the applicator 420 ; 520 ; 620 ; 720 ; AP is in engagement or contact with the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B.
- the present disclosure provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles B.
- the method comprises conveying a stream of articles B in a downstream direction through a packaging apparatus, engaging each article B with an article engaging tool 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 , grouping a plurality of articles B, and simultaneously applying a blank to upper ends of the articles B.
- the method comprises engaging at least one leading registration edge of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B with a reference pin 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 mounted to a leading article engaging tool 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 .
- the method comprises metering the group of articles B and engaging a reference pin 440 ; 540 ; 640 ; 740 mounted to a trailing article engaging tool 432 A, 432 B, 434 ; 532 A, 532 B, 534 ; 632 A, 632 B, 634 ; 732 A, 732 B, 734 with at least one trailing registration edge of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B.
- the method further comprises applying the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B to the group of articles B to engage each article B in a respective article retention device RT 1 , RT 2 provided in a main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 of the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B.
- Applying the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B to the group of articles B comprises inserting a stabilising peg 450 ; 650 , 654 ; P 1 , P 2 in an opening of a stabilisation device M provided in the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 prior to pressing the main panel onto the group of articles B.
- Applying the blank 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B to the group of articles B may further comprise at least partially folding one or more panels comprising the leading and/or trailing registration edges and coupled to the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 .
- Said one or more panels may be folded prior to, simultaneously with, or after the main panel 12 ; 112 ; 312 ; 412 engages the group of articles B.
- the present disclosure provides a carrier 490 of the top engaging type having article retention structures RT, RT 1 , RT 2 for engaging articles B and a blank 410 A-B for forming the article carrier 490 .
- the present disclosure provides a plurality of connected blanks 401 which can be simultaneously applied to a plurality of groups of articles B.
- Each of the blanks 410 A-B in a plurality of connected blanks 401 is frangibly connected to at least one other blank 410 A-B.
- the present disclosure provides an apparatus 700 for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier 490 .
- the apparatus may comprise an article engaging tool 732 A, 732 B, 734 for engaging an article B and conveying the article B in a downstream direction.
- the article engaging tool 732 A, 732 B, 734 comprises a reference device, in the form of an abutment pin or peg 740 , for aligning a plurality of connected blanks 401 with respect to the articles B.
- the plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 may be configured to form metered groups of articles B and align a plurality of connected blanks 401 therewith.
- the articles B may be formed into the metered groups and simultaneously aligned with a plurality of connected blanks 401 as it is fed onto the upper ends of the articles B.
- the plurality of connected blanks 401 may be brought into contact or alignment with an abutment pin 740 mounted to a leading or downstream one of the plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 forming the article groups.
- the plurality of connected blanks 401 may be brought into contact or alignment with an abutment pin 740 mounted to each of a pair of leading or downstream one of the plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 forming the article groups.
- At least one abutment pin 740 mounted to a trailing or upstream one of the plurality of article engaging tools 732 A, 732 B, 734 forming the article groups may be brought into contact with the plurality of connected blanks 401 as the formation of the article group is completed.
- the abutment pin 740 may be shaped to provide at least two points of contact with the registration edge to inhibit movement of the plurality of connected blanks 401 parallel with the direction of flow of the plurality of connected blanks 401 through the apparatus 700 and perpendicularly or laterally with respect to the direction of flow of the plurality of connected blanks 401 through the apparatus 700 .
- the present disclosure provides an applicator AP; 720 for pressing the plurality of connected blanks 401 onto the groups of articles B.
- the applicator AP; 720 may comprise a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article B of the group.
- the applicator 720 may form part of tool head 702 mounted to an overhead wheel arrangement 754 for applying or engaging the plurality of connected blanks 401 to the groups of articles B as they are conveyed upon a conveyor in a downstream direction.
- the applicator AP; 720 comprises at least one disconnecting or separating device for breaking the frangible connections 413 between adjacently disposed blanks 410 A-B.
- the applicator AP; 720 may comprise at least one stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in the main panel 412 of at least one blank 410 A-B forming the plurality of connected blanks 401 .
- the at least one stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 constrains movement of the plurality of connected blanks 401 with respect to the applicator AP; 720 .
- the at least one stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 prevents or inhibits movement of the plurality of connected blanks 401 with respect to the articles B in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the plurality of connected blanks 1 through the packaging apparatus and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the plurality of connected blanks 401 through the packaging apparatus.
- the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 may be detachably or removably mounted to the applicator AP; 720 .
- the stabilisation peg P 1 , P 2 may be coded or keyed to a specific mounting location or orientation.
- the disconnecting or separating device may comprise one or more blades CE 1 , CE 2 , CE 3 , CE 4 , BL; BL 1 ; BL 2 , BL 3 ; BL 4 ; BL 5 arranged to avoid collision with the articles being packaged.
- the blades may be mounted to a common body in a spaced apart configuration.
- the blades be arranged to be received in gaps or voids between two or more articles B, the articles B being generally cylindrical in shape.
- the frangible connections 413 may comprise connecting nicks or bridging portions N 1 , N 2 , N 3 , N 4 in vertical registry with the gaps or voids between two or more articles B.
- the connecting nicks or bridging portions N 1 , N 2 , N 3 , N 4 may be arranged in pairs disposed on substantially opposing sides of a region of closest proximity between an article B in a first blank and an article B in a second connected blank.
- the blades BL, BL 2 , BL 3 may be detachably or removably mounted to the applicator AP; 720 such that the arrangement of the blades BL, BL 2 , BL 3 is reconfigurable depending upon the arrangement and/or size of the blanks being applied to the articles B.
- the present disclosure also provides a disconnecting apparatus for separating a plurality of connected article carriers into discrete carriers.
- the disconnecting apparatus may comprise a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article B of the group.
- the disconnecting apparatus may comprise at least one blades BL; BL 1 ; BL 2 , BL 3 ; BL 4 ; BL 5 detachably or removably mounted thereto such that the arrangement of the blades BL; BL 1 ; BL 2 , BL 3 ; BL 4 ; BL 5 is reconfigurable depending upon the arrangement and/or size of the blanks being applied to the articles B.
- the blade BL; BL 1 ; BL 2 , BL 3 ; BL 4 ; BL 5 may be supported in a direction transverse by a support or supplementary blade.
- the blade and the support or supplementary blade may each comprise receiver in the form of recess or slot for receiving a portion of the other.
- the present disclosure provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles B.
- the method comprises conveying a stream of articles B in a downstream direction through a packaging apparatus, engaging each article B with an article engaging tool 732 A, 732 B, 734 , grouping a plurality of articles B, and simultaneously applying a plurality of connected blanks 401 to upper ends of the articles B.
- the method comprises engaging at least one leading registration edge of the blank plurality of connected blanks 401 with a reference pin 740 mounted to a leading article engaging tool 732 A, 732 B, 734 .
- the method comprises metering the group of articles B and engaging a reference pin 740 mounted to a trailing article engaging tool 732 A, 732 B, 734 with at least one trailing registration edge of the plurality of connected blanks 401 .
- the method further comprises separating the plurality of connected blanks 401 into discrete blanks 410 A, 410 B and applying the discrete blanks 410 A, 410 B simultaneously to respective groups of articles B. Separating the plurality of connected blanks 401 comprises inserting a stabilising peg P 1 , P 2 in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in the main panel 412 prior to severing a frangible connection between pairs of blanks 410 A, 410 B.
- the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B include at least a paperboard substrate.
- the material of the paperboard substrate may be selected from any conventional paperboard, for example, ranging in weight upwardly from about 10 pt., preferably from about 16 pt. to about 28 pt. (0.028′′/ ⁇ 0.7 mm).
- An example of such a substrate is a 27 point (pt.) SBS board (solid bleached sulphate paperboard coated on one side, trade name PrintKote®) or CNK® board (Coated Natural Kraft®—an unbleached kraft paperboard having a clay coating on one side, trade name CarrierKoteTM) manufactured by WestRock® Company.
- the paperboard substrate may be a bleached or unbleached board.
- the board may be coated on at least one side, optionally the side opposite the lamination, with a conventional coating selected for compatibility with the printing method and board composition.
- the blanks 10 ; 110 ; 310 ; 410 A-B may include a tear resistant layer laminated to the paperboard layer. It optionally includes an adhesive layer between the paperboard substrate and the tear resistant layer.
- the tear resistant layer may be disposed over the uncoated side of the paperboard substrate and may be formed of polymeric material and secured to the substrate. The tear resistant layer imparts toughness to the laminate structure.
- Suitable tear resistant materials may include, but not be limited to, tear resistant laminated sheet material, e.g., NATRALOCK®, which may include a layer of an n-axially oriented film, e.g., MYLAR®, which is a bi-axially oriented polyester, oriented nylon, cross-laminated polyolefin or high-density polyolefin.
- MYLAR® n-axially oriented film
- MYLAR® which is a bi-axially oriented polyester, oriented nylon, cross-laminated polyolefin or high-density polyolefin.
- tear resistance may be attributed to the chemical nature of the tear resistant material such as extruded metallocene-catalysed polyethylene (mPE).
- the tear resistant layer may be a layer of linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE).
- LLDPE linear low-density polyethylene
- mPE mPE
- suitable materials having a high level of tear resistance may also be used.
- the adhesive layer may be formed of polyolefin material such as a low-density polyethylene (LDPE).
- LDPE low-density polyethylene
- the size and shape of the panels and apertures may be adjusted to accommodate articles of differing size or shape.
- the shoulder panels may be omitted.
- the present invention is not limited to cartons of the top-engaging type, the invention may be employed with other carton styles such as, but not limited to, open top crates, lidded or closed top crates.
- the separator device may be readily adapted to apply blanks to groups of articles B, similarly the applicator device may be readily adapted to separate a plurality of connected article carriers.
- hinged connection and “fold line” refer to all manner of lines that define hinge features of the blank, facilitate folding portions of the blank with respect to one another, or otherwise indicate optimal panel folding locations for the blank. Any reference to “hinged connection” should not be construed as necessarily referring to a single fold line only; indeed, a hinged connection can be formed from two or more fold lines wherein each of the two or more fold lines may be either straight/linear or curved/curvilinear in shape. When linear fold lines form a hinged connection, they may be disposed parallel with each other or be slightly angled with respect to each other.
- curvilinear fold lines When curvilinear fold lines form a hinged connection, they may intersect each other to define a shaped panel within the area surrounded by the curvilinear fold lines.
- a typical example of such a hinged connection may comprise a pair of arched or arcuate fold lines intersecting at two points such that they define an elliptical panel therebetween.
- a hinged connection may be formed from one or more linear fold lines and one or more curvilinear fold lines.
- a typical example of such a hinged connection may comprise a combination of a linear fold line and an arched or arcuate fold line which intersect at two points such that they define a half moon-shaped panel therebetween.
- fold line may refer to one of the following: a scored line, an embossed line, a debossed line, a line of perforations, a line of short slits, aline of half-cuts, a single half-cut, an interrupted cutline, aline of aligned slits, a line of scores and any combination of the aforesaid options.
- hinged connections and fold lines can each include elements that are formed in the substrate of the blank including perforations, a line of perforations, a line of short slits, a line of half-cuts, a single half-cut, a cutline, an interrupted cutline, slits, scores, embossed lines, debossed lines, any combination thereof, and the like.
- the elements can be dimensioned and arranged to provide the desired functionality.
- a line of perforations can be dimensioned or designed with degrees of weakness to define a fold line and/or a severance line.
- the line of perforations can be designed to facilitate folding and resist breaking, to facilitate folding and facilitate breaking with more effort, or to facilitate breaking with little effort.
- in registry with refers to the alignment of two or more elements in an erected carton, such as an aperture formed in a first of two overlapping panels and a second aperture formed in a second of two overlapping panels. Those elements in registry with each other may be aligned with each other in the direction of the thickness of the overlapping panels. For example, when an aperture in a first panel is “in registry with” a second aperture in a second panel that is placed in an overlapping arrangement with the first panel, an edge of the aperture may extend along at least a portion of an edge of the second aperture and may be aligned, in the direction of the thickness of the first and second panels, with the second aperture.
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
- Packages (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application is a continuation-in-part of PCT Patent Application No. PCT/US2022/034305, filed Jun. 21, 2022, the entire content of which is incorporated herein by reference.
- The present invention relates to packaging systems, to packaging machines and apparatus therefor, to article carriers and blanks for forming the same, and to methods of packaging articles. More specifically, but not exclusively, the invention relates to a carrier of the top-gripping type having one or more apertures for receiving and retaining an article therein and to methods and apparatus for forming the same.
- In the field of packaging, it is known to provide cartons for carrying multiple articles. Cartons are well known in the art and are useful for enabling consumers to transport, store and access a group of articles for consumption. For cost and environmental considerations, such cartons or carriers need to be formed from as little material as possible and cause as little wastage in the materials from which they are formed as possible. Further considerations are the strength of the carton and its suitability for holding and transporting large weights of articles. It is desirable that the contents of the carton are secure within the carton.
- It is well known to provide top gripping article carriers in which an aperture is formed in a panel of the carrier, wherein tabs are struck from said panel and are arranged about the aperture. The tabs are displaced out of the plane of said panel when an article is received in the aperture, wherein said tabs engage the article generally about a flange or lip of the article.
- It is desirable to automate formation of the packages from the article carriers by employing a packaging machine capable of operating at high production capacities. In particular it is desirable to package articles as they are in continuous motion, in a downstream direction, through a packaging apparatus.
- The present invention seeks to provide an improvement in the field of packaging, of cartons, typically formed from paperboard or the like, and apparatus for assembly of said cartons.
- A first aspect of the invention provides an article engaging carrier for packaging at least one article. The carrier comprises a main panel having at least one article retention structure for engaging an article. The carrier comprises at least one panel having a peripheral edge, a portion of which provides at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device of a packaging apparatus.
- Optionally, the article carrier comprises a side panel hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection.
- Optionally, the at least one registration edge is provided by a peripheral edge portion of the side panel.
- Optionally, the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- Optionally, the article carrier comprises a cover panel hingedly connected to the side panel by a hinged connection.
- Optionally, the at least one registration edge is provided by a peripheral edge portion of the cover panel.
- Optionally, the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- Optionally, the article carrier comprises a pair of opposing side panels each hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection and comprising at least one registration edge.
- Optionally, the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- Optionally, the article carrier comprises a pair of opposing side panels each hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection, a cover panel hingedly connected to each of the pair of opposing side panels and comprising at least one registration edge.
- Optionally, the at least one registration edge comprises a leading registration edge and a trailing registration edge.
- Optionally, the article carrier comprises a pair of opposing end panels each hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection.
- Optionally, the panel having a peripheral edge portion providing at least one registration edge is hingedly connected to the main panel by a hinged connection.
- Optionally, the panel having a peripheral edge portion providing at least one registration edge is hingedly connected to the main panel by at least one hinge panel.
- Optionally, the at least one panel comprises a pair of panels each having a registration edge, a linear notional line passing through the registration edge in each of pair of panels passes through an opening in the main panel defined by the at least one article retention structure.
- Optionally, the main panel comprises at least one stabilisation device providing an opening in the main panel and configured to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions.
- A second aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier. The apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction. The article engagement tool comprises a reference device for aligning at least one blank with one or more articles.
- Optionally, the apparatus comprises an overhead conveyor for conveying the at least one blank onto the one or more articles.
- Optionally, the reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles.
- Optionally, the article engagement tool comprises a removable head to which the reference device is mounted.
- Optionally, the head comprises part of a tool-less attachment system.
- Optionally, the tool-less attachment system comprises a bayonet fitting.
- Optionally, the apparatus comprises a plurality of article engagement tools each for engaging a respective article, metering and grouping the articles and conveying said articles in a downstream direction as at least one metered group.
- Optionally, each of the plurality of article engagement tools is driven independently about an endless track having a working reach and a return reach.
- Optionally, the plurality of article engagement tools comprises at least one leading article engagement tool and at least one trailing article engagement tool.
- Optionally, the at least one leading article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective leading registration edge of the at least one blank.
- Optionally, the at least one trailing article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective trailing registration edge of the at least one blank.
- Optionally, the abutment pin is shaped to provide at least two points of contact with a registration edge of the at least one blank to inhibit movement of the at least one blank parallel with the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus and laterally with respect to the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus.
- Optionally, the apparatus comprises an applicator for pressing the at least one blank onto the at least one group of articles, the applicator comprises a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article of the at least one group of articles formed by the apparatus.
- Optionally, the applicator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of the at least one blank, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of the at least one blank with respect to the applicator.
- Optionally, at least one stabilisation peg prevents or inhibits movement of the at least one blank with respect to the at least one group of articles in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the at least one blank through the apparatus.
- Optionally, the applicator is mounted to an overhead conveyor, in the form of a wheel, such that the applicator applies the at least one blank to the group of articles as it is conveyed downstream by the plurality of article engagement tools.
- Optionally, the applicator comprises one or more folding brakes for folding at least one panel hinged to the main panel at least partially about the at least one group of articles, said panel comprising at least one registration edge configured to engage the reference device.
- Optionally, the apparatus comprises one or more static folding guides for folding one or more panels of the at least one blank whilst the applicator is in engagement with the at least one blank.
- A third aspect of the invention provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles, the method comprising:
-
- conveying a stream of articles in a downstream direction through a packaging apparatus;
- engaging each article with an article engagement tool;
- grouping at least one group of articles, and simultaneously
- applying at least one blank to upper ends of the articles;
- engaging at least one leading registration edge of the at least one blank with a reference pin mounted to a leading article engagement tool;
- metering the at least one group of articles; and
- engaging a reference pin mounted to a trailing article engagement tool with at least one trailing registration edge of the at least one blank.
- Optionally, the method further comprises;
-
- applying the at least one blank to the at least one group of articles to engage each article in a respective article retention device provided in a main panel of the at least one blank.
- Optionally, applying the at least one blank to the at least one group of articles comprises;
-
- inserting a stabilising peg in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of the at least one blank prior to pressing the main panel onto the at least one group of articles.
- Optionally, applying the at least one blank to the at least one group of articles may further comprise:
-
- folding, at least partially, one or more panels coupled to the main panel and comprising at least one of the leading and trailing registration edges.
- Optionally, the one or more panels is folded prior to engaging the main panel with the at least one group of articles.
- Optionally, the one or more panels is folded simultaneously with engaging the main panel with the at least one group of articles.
- Optionally, the one or more panels is folded after engaging the main panel with the at least one group of articles.
- A fourth aspect of the invention provides a blank for forming an article carrier. The blank comprises a main panel having at least one article retention structure for engaging an article. The blank comprises at least one panel having a peripheral edge. A portion of the peripheral edge provides at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device of a packaging apparatus.
- A fifth aspect of the invention provides an applicator device for separating a plurality of connected blanks into discrete blanks and pressing each a blank onto two or more groups of articles, the applicator comprises a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article and a disconnecting device for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed blanks.
- Optionally, the applicator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of each blank, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of said blank with respect to the applicator.
- Optionally, the at least one stabilisation peg is detachably mounted to a plate in which the article receiving orifices are provided.
- Optionally, the at least one stabilisation peg is keyed to a given receiving location on the plate.
- Optionally, the at least one stabilisation peg is keyed to a given receiving orientation with respect to the plate.
- Optionally, the applicator comprises a plate and at least one guide depending therefrom for retaining the groups of articles in a predefined arrangement.
- Optionally, the disconnecting device comprises one or more blades mounted to a plate in which the article receiving orifices are provided.
- Optionally, the one or more blades is detachably mounted to the plate.
- Optionally, the one or more blades comprises at least one detent for engaging a catch in a slot provided in the plate.
- Optionally, the plate comprises one or more release openings for enabling release of the detent from the catch.
- Optionally, the plate comprises plurality of blade receiving locations and a plurality of blades that can be reconfigured a desired arrangement to accommodate a given configuration of connected blanks.
- A sixth aspect of the invention provides a disconnecting apparatus for separating a plurality of connected article carriers engaged with groups of articles, the disconnecting apparatus comprises a plate having a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article and a plurality of blade receiving locations each capable of detachably mounting a disconnecting blade for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed carriers, and a plurality of blades is detachably mounted to the plate, the plurality of blades being reconfigurable to a desired arrangement to accommodate a given configuration of connected carriers.
- Optionally, the plurality of blades is mountable to the plate in first arrangement to separate a first configuration of connected carriers and is mountable to the plate in second, different, arrangement to separate a second, different, configuration of connected carriers.
- A seventh aspect of the invention provides a plurality of connected blanks for forming a plurality of article carriers. Each blank is frangibly connected to at least one adjacent blank by a frangible connection comprising at least one pair of connecting nick. Each blank comprises an engaging panel having at least one article retention device for receiving and suspending an article therefrom. A first article retention device in a first blank and a second article retention device in a second blank define a notional line passing through the centre of each of the first and second article retention devices. The notional line is perpendicular to a frangible connection between the first and second blank. A pair of connecting nicks are disposed on opposing sides of the notional line. The notional line defines a region of closest proximity between the first and second article retention devices.
- An eighth aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier. The apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction. The article engagement tool comprises a reference device for aligning a plurality of connected blanks with two or more groups of articles.
- Optionally, the apparatus comprises an applicator for separating the plurality of connected blanks into discrete blanks and pressing each a blank onto the two or more groups of articles, the applicator comprises a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article and a disconnecting device for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed blanks.
- Optionally, the applicator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of each blank, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of said blanks with respect to the applicator.
- Optionally, the at least one stabilisation peg prevents or inhibits movement of the blanks with respect to the group of articles in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the blanks through the apparatus and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the blanks through the apparatus.
- Optionally, the applicator is mounted to an overhead conveyor, in the form of a wheel, such that the applicator applies the blanks to the groups of articles as it is conveyed downstream by the plurality of article engagement tools.
- Optionally, the apparatus comprises an overhead conveyor for conveying the plurality of connected blanks onto the one or more articles.
- Optionally, the reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles.
- Optionally, the article engagement tool comprises a removable head to which the reference device is mounted.
- Optionally, the apparatus comprises a plurality of article engagement tools each for engaging a respective article, metering and grouping the articles and conveying said articles in a downstream direction as metered groups.
- Optionally, the plurality of article engagement tools comprises at least one leading article engagement tool and at least one trailing article engagement tool.
- Optionally, the at least one leading article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective leading registration edge of the plurality of connected blanks.
- Optionally, the at least one trailing article engagement tool is configured to engage a respective trailing registration edge of the plurality of connected blanks.
- A ninth aspect of the invention provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles, the method comprising:
-
- forming at least two groups of articles,
- applying a plurality of connected blanks to upper ends of the articles;
- engaging reference pins with the plurality of connected blanks and aligning the plurality of connected blanks to the articles;
- lowering an applicator with respect to the articles and the plurality of connected blanks so as to insert a stabilisation pin in an opening in each of the blanks;
- further lowering the applicator to cleave through frangible connections between adjacently disposed blanks; bringing a plate of the applicator into contact with each of the discrete blanks;
- lowering the applicator further to press the discrete blanks over upper ends of the articles and displacing engaging tabs upwardly out of the plane of the blanks until the tabs engage a flange about the upper ends of the articles.
- A tenth aspect of the invention provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles, the method comprising:
-
- conveying a stream of articles in a downstream direction through a packaging apparatus;
- engaging each article with an article engagement tool;
- grouping a plurality of groups of articles, and simultaneously
- applying a plurality of connected blanks to upper ends of the articles;
- engaging at least one leading registration edge of the blank with a reference pin mounted to a leading article engagement tool;
- metering the groups of articles; and
- engaging a reference pin mounted to a trailing article engagement tool with at least one trailing registration edge of the plurality of connected blanks.
- Optionally, the method further comprises;
-
- separating the plurality of connected blanks into discrete blanks and applying said discrete blanks to the groups of articles to engage each article in a respective article retention device provided in a main panel of the blanks.
- Optionally, applying the blanks to the groups of articles comprises;
-
- inserting a stabilising peg in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of each blank prior to separating the plurality of connected blanks into discrete blanks.
- An eleventh aspect of the invention provides a plurality of connected blanks for forming a plurality of article carriers. Each blank is frangibly connected to at least one adjacent blank by a frangible connection. Each blank of the plurality of connected blanks comprises a main panel having at least one article retention structure for engaging an article. The plurality of connected blanks comprises at least one panel having a peripheral edge. A portion of the peripheral edge provides at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device of a packaging apparatus.
- A twelfth aspect of the invention provides a separator apparatus for separating a plurality of connected article carriers into discrete article carriers. The separator comprises a disconnecting device for breaking frangible connections between adjacently disposed article carriers.
- Optionally, the separator comprises at least one stabilisation peg receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in a main panel of each article carrier, the at least one stabilisation peg being configured to constrain movement of said article carrier with respect to the separator.
- Optionally, the separator comprises at least one guide for aligning the plurality of connected article carriers therewith.
- Optionally, the separator comprises a pair of opposed guides for aligning the plurality of connected article carriers therewith, the plurality of connected article carriers being receivable between the pair of opposed guides.
- Optionally, the separator is mounted to an overhead conveyor and is transferred continuously downstream through a working reach of a packaging machine in synchronicity with the article carriers.
- Optionally, the reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles, the abutment pin having a head.
- Optionally, the head provides a reference body.
- Optionally, the reference body provides a wall for engaging an edge of the at least one blank.
- Optionally, the wall is a cylindrical wall.
- Optionally, an upper end of the head is tapered to provide an inclined surface for aligning the at least one blank with the reference body.
- Optionally, the inclined surface is conical.
- Optionally, the head comprises a support surface for inhibiting undesired deformation or creasing of the blank in a target region thereof.
- Optionally, the head comprise a reference body extending from the support surface.
- A thirteenth aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier. The apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction. The article engagement tool comprises a reference device for aligning a plurality of connected blanks with two or more groups of articles. The reference device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool beyond the upper extremity of the one or more articles. The abutment pin has a head, the head comprises a support surface for inhibiting undesired deformation or creasing of the plurality of connected blanks in a target region thereof.
- A fourteenth aspect of the invention provides an apparatus for packaging one or more articles in an article carrier. The apparatus comprises an article engagement tool for engaging an article and conveying the article in a downstream direction. The article engagement tool comprises a support device for supporting a portion of at least one blank. The support device comprises an abutment pin extending upwardly from the article engagement tool. The abutment pin has a head. The head comprises a support surface for inhibiting undesired deformation of the at least one blank in a target region thereof.
- Further features and advantages of the present invention will be apparent from the specific embodiments illustrated in the drawings and discussed below.
- Within the scope of this application, it is envisaged or intended that the various aspects, embodiments, examples, features and alternatives set out in the preceding paragraphs, in the claims and/or in the following description and drawings may be considered or taken independently or in any combination thereof.
- Features or elements described in connection with, or relation to, one embodiment are applicable to all embodiments unless there is an incompatibility of features. One or more features or elements from one embodiment may be incorporated into, or combined with, any of the other embodiments disclosed herein, said features or elements extracted from said one embodiment may be included in addition to, or in replacement of one or more features or elements of said other embodiment.
- A feature, or combination of features, of an embodiment disclosed herein may be extracted in isolation from other features of that embodiment. Alternatively, a feature, or combination of features, of an embodiment may be omitted from that embodiment.
- Exemplary embodiments of the invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, in which:
-
FIG. 1 is a plan view from above of a blank for forming a carrier according to embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 2 is a perspective view from above of a carrier formed from the blank ofFIG. 1 ; -
FIG. 3 is a plan view from above of a blank for forming a carrier according to various embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 4 is a perspective view from above of a carrier formed from the blank ofFIG. 3 ; -
FIG. 5A is a plan view from above of a blank for forming a carrier according to embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 5B is an enlarged plan view of a portion of the blank ofFIG. 5A ; -
FIG. 6 is a perspective view from above of a carrier formed from the blank ofFIG. 5A ; -
FIG. 7 is a perspective view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 8 is an end view of the packaging apparatus ofFIG. 7 ; -
FIG. 9 is a plan view of the packaging apparatus ofFIG. 7 ; -
FIG. 10 is a perspective view from below of the packaging apparatus ofFIG. 7 ; -
FIG. 11 is a perspective view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to alternative embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 12 is a side view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 13 is a plan view from above of a pair of connected blanks each for forming a carrier according to an embodiment of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 14 to 17 illustrate stages of construction of the connected blanks ofFIG. 13 into carriers by an applicator device; -
FIG. 18 illustrates disconnecting blades according to various embodiments for use with an applicator device; -
FIG. 19 is a side view of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packaging system according to embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 20 is a perspective view from below of a separation device forming a part of a packing system according to alternative embodiments of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 21 is an end view of the separation device ofFIG. 20 ; -
FIG. 22 is a sectional view of the separation device ofFIG. 20 ; -
FIG. 23 is a cutaway view of the separation device ofFIG. 20 in operational engagement with a plurality of packaged groups of articles; -
FIG. 24 is a side view of a packaging apparatus showing various stages of operation of separation devices according to the embodiment ofFIG. 20 ; -
FIG. 25 is a perspective view from above of a packaging apparatus forming a part of a packing system according to embodiments of the present disclosure; and -
FIG. 26 is an enlarged perspective view from above of a portion of the packaging apparatus ofFIG. 25 . - Detailed descriptions of specific embodiments of the packaging system, apparatus, methods package, blanks, and carriers are disclosed herein. It will be understood that the disclosed embodiments are merely examples of the way in which certain aspects of the invention can be implemented and do not represent an exhaustive list of all of the ways the invention may be embodied. As used herein, the word “exemplary” is used expansively to refer to embodiments that serve as illustrations, specimens, models, or patterns. Indeed, it will be understood that the packaging system, apparatus, methods, packages, blanks, and carriers described herein may be embodied in various and alternative forms. The Figures are not necessarily to scale and some features may be exaggerated or minimised to show details of particular components. Well-known components, materials or methods are not necessarily described in great detail in order to avoid obscuring the present disclosure. Any specific structural and functional details disclosed herein are not to be interpreted as limiting, but merely as a basis for the claims and as a representative basis for teaching one skilled in the art to variously employ the invention.
- Referring to
FIG. 1 , there is shown a plan view of a blank 10 which is capable of forming a carton orcarrier 90, as shown inFIG. 2 , for containing and carrying a group of primary products such as, but not limited to, bottles or cans, hereinafter referred to as articles B, as shown inFIG. 2 . The articles B may be generally cylindrical; the articles B may comprise a circular cross-sectional shape, at least about a region of engagement with thecarrier 90. The blank 10 forms a secondary package for packaging at least one primary product container or package.Alternative blanks 110; 310; 410A-B are shown inFIGS. 3 to 6 andFIGS. 13 to 17 for forming an alternative cartons orcarriers 190; 390; 490. - In the embodiments detailed herein, the terms “carton” and “carrier” refer, for the non-limiting purpose of illustrating the various features of the invention, to a container for engaging and carrying articles, such as primary product containers. It is contemplated that the teachings of the invention can be applied to various product containers, which may or may not be tapered and/or cylindrical. Exemplary containers include bottles (for example metallic, glass or plastics bottles), cans (for example aluminium cans), tins, pouches, packets and the like.
- The
blanks 10; 110; 310; 410A-B are formed from a sheet of suitable substrate. It is to be understood that, as used herein, the term “suitable substrate” includes all manner of foldable sheet material such as paperboard, corrugated board, cardboard, plastic, combinations thereof, and the like. It should be recognised that one or other numbers of blanks may be employed, where suitable, for example, to provide the carrier structure described in more detail below. - The packaging structures or cartons described herein may be formed from a sheet material such as paperboard, which may be made of or coated with materials to increase its strength. An example of such a sheet material is tear-resistant NATRALOCK® paperboard made by WestRock Company. It should be noted that the tear resistant materials may be provided by more than one layer, to help improve the tear-resistance of the package. Typically, one surface of the sheet material may have different characteristics to the other surface. For example, the surface of the sheet material that faces outwardly from a finished package may be particularly smooth and may have a coating such as a clay coating or other surface treatment to provide good printability. The surface of the sheet material that faces inwardly may, on the other hand, be provided with a coating, a layer, a treatment or be otherwise prepared to provide properties such as one or more of tear-resistance, good glue-ability, heat sealability, or other desired functional properties.
- In the embodiments illustrated in
FIGS. 1 to 12 , theblanks 10; 110; 310 are configured to form a carton orcarrier 90; 190; 390; for packaging an exemplary arrangement of exemplary articles B. In the illustrated embodiments, the arrangement is a 2×4 matrix or array—two rows of four articles B are provided—and the articles B are beverage cans. Alternatively, theblanks 10; 110; 310 can be configured to form a carrier for packaging other types, number and size of articles and/or for packaging articles in a different arrangement or configuration. - The embodiments illustrated in
FIGS. 1 to 6 theblanks 10; 110; 310 are configured to accommodate beverage cans of the sleek or slim design that may be 330 ml cans. The articles B are substantially of the same diameter over their entire height. An exemplary article B has a maximum diameter or lateral dimension (the diameter may be about 2.25 inches or about 58 mm). The article B comprises an upper portion or top closure which has a diameter or lateral dimension (the diameter may be about 2.125 inches or 54.8 mm). - The neck may provide an outwardly projecting flange, that is to say it may comprise an undercut for engaging with the carrier. A top closure may be attached to the side wall of the article B to form a seam or “chime” which provides the flange. In some embodiments the variation in diameter between the top closure and the main body of the article B is less than 7 mm, may be less than 5 mm and optionally is less than 4 mm.
- As used herein the terms “sleek” or “slim” refer to articles B which have little or no variation in their lateral dimension between the top closure which engages with the
carrier 90; 190; 390 and the main body of the article B. The articles B are substantially parallel sided or of substantially uniform diameter. - Referring to
FIG. 1 there is shown a blank 10 comprising a plurality of 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, including apanels main panel 12 for forming a top wall or an engaging panel of a carrier 90 (seeFIG. 2 ). - The blank 10 includes a
first end panel 14 hingedly connected to a first end of themain panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 13. The blank 10 includes asecond end panel 16 hingedly connected to a second side of themain panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 15. - The blank 10 includes a
first side panel 18 hingedly connected to a first side of themain panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 17. The blank 10 includes asecond side panel 20 hingedly connected to a second side of themain panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 19. - The
main panel 12 includes at least one article retention structure RT1, RT2. In the illustrated embodiment, themain panel 12 comprises a plurality of article retention structures RT1, RT2 specifically eight article retention structures RT1, RT2 arranged in 4×2 matrix or array. Themain panel 12 comprises two columns of article retention structures RT1, RT2, each column comprises four article retention structures RT1, RT2. Themain panel 12 comprises four rows of article retention structures RT1, RT2, each row comprises two article retention structures RT1, RT2. Each of the article retention structures RT1, RT2 may comprise an aperture A1, A2. - The blank 10 comprises four first article retention structures RT1. The first article retention structures RT1 are located adjacent to ends of the
main panel 12. The blank 10 comprises four second article retention structures RT2. The second article retention structures RT2 are located between a first pair of first article retention structures RT1 disposed proximate a first end of themain panel 12 and a second pair of first article retention structures RT1 disposed proximate a second end of themain panel 12. The second article retention structures RT2 are also referred to herein as intermediate article retention structures RT2. The first article retention structures RT1 are also referred to herein as end article retention structures RT1. - Each of the first article retention structures RT1 is substantially similar in construction and will therefore be described in detail with reference to a first one of the first article retention structures RT1 located adjacent to a first end of the blank 10 as shown in
FIG. 1 . - The first article retention structure RT1 comprises an article receiving opening defined in part by an aperture A1.
- The first article retention structure RT1 comprises a plurality of engaging
40 a, 40 b, 40 c disposed about the aperture A1.teeth - The plurality of
40 a, 40 b, 40 c are hinged to theteeth main panel 12 by a fold line. The fold line may be defined by a plurality ofcut lines 43, 45. The plurality ofcut lines 43, 45 may define or approximate a squircle or rounded square. - The first article retention structure RT1 may comprise a plurality of first or
full teeth 40 a disposed about the aperture A1. Each of the plurality offirst teeth 40 a comprises an engaging edge E1 opposing a hinged edge. The engaging edges E1 are defined by a linear portion of a cut line defining the aperture A1. Each engaging edge E1 defines a part of a polygon. The illustrated embodiment comprises fourfirst teeth 40 a. Each tooth 46 comprises a pair of side edges, the side edges are defined bycut lines 41 extending radially outward from respective vertices of the polygon. That is to say from a respective vertex between a pair of adjacent linear portions of the cut line defining the aperture A1. The cut lines 41 are divergently arranged with respect to each other and define an angle therebetween, the angle may be about 22.5°. - The first article retention structure RT1 may comprise a plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43. Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 is aligned with one of the radial cut lines 41 such that said one of the radial cut lines 41 or a notional extension thereof bisects a respective one of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43.
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 is spaced apart from said one of the radial cut lines 41 bisecting it so as to define a connecting nick or bridge portion between a pair of adjacently disposed
40 a, 40 b, 40 c. Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 may be linear in shape.teeth - The first article retention structure RT1 may comprise a plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45. Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45 is disposed between a pair of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 and is spaced apart therefrom so as to define a pair of connecting nick or bridge portions between each
40 a, 40 b, 40 c and thetooth main panel 12. The pair of connecting nick or bridge portions provide a hinged or foldable connection between each 40 a, 40 b, 40 c and thetooth main panel 12. - Each of the plurality of second
circumferential cut lines 45 may be linear in shape. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 may be arcuate or curved. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of secondcircumferential cut lines 45 may be arcuate or curved. - In the illustrated embodiment, the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 45 is equal to the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 43 however in other embodiments it may be different.
- Optionally, the plurality of
40 a, 40 b, 40 c is interrupted by a first recess or cutaway C1. The first recess C1 lies upon a first notional line. First notional line extends radially through the centre of the aperture A1 and passes through the centre of the first recess C1. The first notional line extends transversely of the blank 10. The first notional line may extend along the grain of the blank 10. The first notional line may be oriented parallel with respect to the grain direction.teeth - Optionally, the plurality of
40 a, 40 b, 40 c is interrupted by a second recess or cutaway C2. The second recess C2 lies upon a second notional line. Second notional line extends radially from the centre of the aperture A1 and passes through the centre of the second recess C2. The second notional line extends longitudinally of the blank 10. The second notional line may extend across the grain of the blank 10. The second notional line may be oriented perpendicularly with respect to the grain direction.teeth - The first recess C1 is dimensioned so as to occupy a first arc defined by a first minor sector. The first minor sector is defined in part by a first sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A1 and passing through a side edge of a first
partial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a first side of the first recess C1 and in part by a second sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A1 and passing through a side edge of a secondpartial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a second, opposing, side of the first recess C1. - The second recess C2 is dimensioned so as to occupy a second arc defined by a second minor sector. The second minor sector is defined in part by a third sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A1 and passing through a side edge of a third
partial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a first side of the second recess C2 and in part by a fourth sector notional line extending radially from the centre of the aperture A1 and passing through a side edge of a fourthpartial tooth 40 b disposed adjacent a second, opposing, side of the second recess C2. - The first and third sector notional lines define a first toothed sector or arc therebetween. The second and fourth sector notional lines define a second toothed sector or arc therebetween.
- The first article retention structure RT1 may comprise at least one
42, 44. The illustrated embodiment comprises a pair oftab 42, 44. Thetabs 42, 44 are located orthogonally to each other about the perimeter of the opening. Thetabs 42, 44 may engage an article received in first article retention structure RT1, thetabs 42, 44 do not support or bear the load (or part thereof) of the article B.tabs - The
42, 44 facilitate folding of the side and endtabs 14, 16, 18, 20 and/or retention of the side and endpanels 14, 16, 18, 20 in a folded condition.panels - Each of the first article retention structures RT1 may comprise at least one
first tab 42 integral with one of the first and 14, 16. Thesecond end panels first tab 42 is disposed opposite the second recess C2. A centre offirst tab 42 lies upon the second notional line. - Each of the first article retention structures RT1 may comprise at least one
second tab 44 integral with one of the first and 18, 20. Thesecond side panels second tab 44 is disposed opposite the first recess C1. A centre ofsecond tab 44 lies upon the first notional line. - The first and
42, 44 are defined, at least in part, by a cut line. The cut line is substantially ‘U’ shaped. The cut line is asymmetric. The cut line comprises a base portion defining a portion of the aperture A1 and a pair of leg portions extending therefrom. A first one of the leg portions is longer than a second one of the leg portions. The first leg portion may terminate in a ‘J’ or ‘C’ shaped cut. The first leg portion is disposed in closer proximity to a corner of thesecond tabs main panel 12 than the second leg portion. - The first article retention structures RT1 may comprise second
partial teeth 40 c disposed upon opposing sides of each of the first and 42, 44. The secondsecond tabs partial teeth 40 c are separated from one of the first or 42, 44 by one of the first or second leg portions of the ‘U’ shaped cut line.second tabs - The first and
42, 44 are longer or taller in height than the engagingsecond tabs 40 a, 40 b, 40 c. The first andteeth 42, 44 can be considered to extend into the aperture A1 so as to reduce the width or radius of the aperture A1.second tabs - The plurality of first and second circumferential cut lines 43, 45 define an opening having non-circular shape. The opening may be a squircle or truncated circle.
- The
full teeth 40 a may have a radial height dimension which is constant over an arc or sector which they define. The hinged connection of eachfull tooth 40 a may define a portion of a circle or may define a portion of a squircle. - The
40 b, 40 c may have a radial height dimension that varies across their width. The height of thepartial teeth 40 b, 40 c, the distance between the hinged connection to thepartial teeth main panel 12 and the opposing free edge defined by the aperture A1 may reduce as towards a recess C1, C2 or 42, 44.tabs - The first article retention structures RT1 may comprise discrete groups of
40 a, 40 b, 40 c, defined between a pair of recess C1, C2, between a pair ofteeth 42, 44 or between one of the recesses C1, C2 and one of thetabs 42, 44. Each group oftabs 40 a, 40 b, 40 c may comprise oneteeth full tooth 40 a and a pair of 40 b, 40 c. Apartial teeth 40 b, 40 c may be disposed on opposite sides of thepartial tooth full tooth 40 a and separated therefrom by aradial cut line 41. The first article retention structures RT1 may comprise at least one, two or more discrete groups of at least two, three, or 40 a, 40 b, 40 c.more teeth - Each group of
40 a, 40 b, 40 c is hinged to theteeth main panel 12 by a hinged connection the hinged connection is non-circular in shape, and may be defined by a portion of a squircle, truncated circle, flattened circle or rounded square. - The shape may be or approximate a superellipse or hyperellipse.
- Each of the second article retention structures RT2 is substantially similar in construction and will therefore be described in detail with reference to a first one of the second article retention structures RT2 located adjacent to the first one of the first article retention structures RT1 as shown in
FIG. 1 . - The second article retention structure RT2 comprises an article receiving opening defined in part by a second aperture A2.
- The second article retention structure RT2 comprises a plurality of
50 a, 50 b, 50 c disposed about the second aperture A2.teeth - The plurality of
50 a, 50 b, 50 c are hinged to theteeth main panel 12 by a fold line. The fold line may be defined by a plurality ofcut lines 53, 55. The plurality ofcut lines 53, 55 may define or approximate a squircle. - The second aperture A2 may comprise a plurality of first or
full teeth 50 a disposed about the second aperture A2. Each of the plurality offirst teeth 50 a comprises an engaging edge E2 opposing a hinged edge. The engaging edges E2 are defined by a linear portion of a cut line defining the second aperture A2. Each engaging edge E2 defines a part or side of a polygon. The illustrated embodiment comprises fourfirst teeth 50 a together defining a portion of a polygon. Eachtooth 50 a comprises a pair of side edges, the side edges are defined by cut lines 51 extending radially outward from respective vertices of the polygon. That is to say from a respective vertex between a pair of adjacent linear portions of the cut line defining the second aperture A2. The cut lines 51 are divergently arranged with respect to each other and define an angle therebetween, the angle may be about 22.5°. - The second article retention structure RT2 may comprise a plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53. Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 is aligned with one of the radial cut lines 51 such that said one of the radial cut lines 41, or a notional extension thereof, bisects a respective one of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53.
- Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 is spaced apart from said one of the radial cut lines 41 bisecting it so as to define a connecting nick or bridge portion between a pair of adjacently disposed
50 a, 50 b, 50 c. The connecting nick or bridge portion is disposed proximate a base of theteeth 50 a, 50 b, 50 c.teeth - Each of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 may be linear in shape.
- The second article retention structure RT2 may comprise a plurality of second circumferential cut lines 55. Each of the plurality of second circumferential cut lines 55 is disposed between a pair of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 53 and is spaced apart therefrom so as to define a pair of connecting nick or bridge portions between each
50 a, 50 b, 50 c and thetooth main panel 12. The pair of connecting nick or bridge portions provide a hinged or foldable connection between each 50 a, 50 b, 50 c and thetooth main panel 12. - Each of the plurality of second
circumferential cut lines 55 may be linear in shape. - The plurality of
50 a, 50 b, 50 c is interrupted by a first recess or cutaway C1, by a second recess or cutaway C2 and by a third recess or cutaway C3. The second and third recesses C2, C3 each lie upon the second notional line extending longitudinally of the blank 10. The second notional line extends radially from the centre of the second aperture A2 and passes through the centre of each of the second and third recesses C2, C3.teeth - The first and second recesses C1, C2 are substantially similar in construction and arrangement to the first and second recesses C1, C2 of the first article retention structures RT1. The third recess is substantially similar in construction and arrangement to the second recess C1, C2 albeit in opposition thereto.
- The second and third recesses C2, C3 are diametrically opposed to each other.
- The first recess C1 is oriented or disposed substantially orthogonally to the second and third recesses C2, C3.
- The centres of the second and third recesses C2, C3 of the second article retention structure RT2 are collinear with the centre of the second recess C2 of the first article retention structure RT1.
- The third recess C3 of the second article retention structure RT2 is disposed proximate to the second recess C2 of the first article retention structure RT1 and is oriented in opposition thereto.
- Each of the first recesses C1 of the second article retention structures RT2 is disposed proximate to a first recess C1 of an adjacently disposed second article retention structures RT2, and is oriented in opposition thereto.
- Each of the first recesses C1 of the first article retention structures RT1 is disposed proximate to a first recess C1 of an adjacently disposed first article retention structures RT1, and is oriented in opposition thereto.
- The second article retention structure RT2 may comprise at least one
tab 54. The illustrated embodiment comprises asingle tab 54. Thetab 54 may engage an article received in second article retention structure RT2, thetab 54 does not support or bear the load (or part thereof) of the article B. - The
tab 54 facilitates folding of one of the 18, 20 and/or retention of theside panels 18, 20 in a folded condition.side panels - Each of the second article retention structure RT2 comprises at
tab 54 integral with one of the first and 18, 20. Thesecond side panels tab 54 is disposed opposite the first recess C1. A centre oftab 54 lies upon the first notional line. - The
tabs 54 are defined, at least in part, by a cut line. The cut line is substantially ‘U’ shaped. The cut line is symmetric. The cut line comprises a base portion defining a portion of the aperture A2 and a pair of leg portions extending therefrom. A first one of the leg portions is equal in length to a second one of the leg portions. - The second article retention structure RT2 may comprise second partial teeth 50 c disposed upon opposing sides of the
tab 54. The second partial teeth 50 c are separated from thetab 54 by one of the first or second leg portions of the ‘U’ shaped cut line. - The
tab 54 is longer or taller in height than the engaging 50 a, 50 b, 50 c. Theteeth tab 54 can be considered to extend into the aperture A2 so as to reduce the width or radius of the aperture A2. - The plurality of first and second circumferential cut lines 53, 55 define an opening having non-circular shape. The opening may be a squircle or truncated circle.
- The
full teeth 50 a may have a radial height dimension which is constant over an arc or sector which they define. The hinged connection of eachfull tooth 50 a may define a portion of a circle. - The
partial teeth 50 b, 50 c may have a radial height dimension that varies across their width. The height of thepartial teeth 50 b, 50 c, the distance between the hinged connection to themain panel 12 and the opposing free edge defined by the aperture A2 may reduce as towards a recess C1, C2, C3 ortab 54. - The second article retention structures RT2 may comprise discrete groups of
50 a, 50 b, 50 c, defined between a pair of recess C1, C2, C3 or between one of the recesses C1, C2, C3 and theteeth tab 44. Each group of 50 a, 50 b, 50 c may comprise oneteeth full tooth 50 a and a pair ofpartial teeth 50 b, 50 c. Apartial tooth 50 b, 50 c may be disposed on opposite sides of thefull tooth 50 a and separated therefrom by a radial cut line 51. The second article retention structures RT2 may comprise at least one, two or more discrete groups of at least two, three, or 50 a, 50 b, 50 c.more teeth - Each group of
50 a, 50 b, 50 c is hinged to theteeth main panel 12 by a hinged connection the hinged connection is non-circular in shape, and may be defined by a portion of a squircle, truncated circle, flattened circle or rounded square. The shape may be or approximate a superellipse or hyperellipse. - The
fold line 13 hinging thefirst end panel 14 to themain panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate. Thefold line 13 hinging thefirst end panel 14 to themain panel 12 extends substantially between a pair of adjacently disposed first article retention structures RT1. Thefold line 13 defines a convex hinged portion when viewed from an external viewpoint. - The
fold line 15 hinging thesecond end panel 16 to themain panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate. Thefold line 15 hinging thesecond end panel 16 to themain panel 12 extends substantially between a pair of adjacently disposed first article retention structures RT1. Thefold line 15 defines a convex hinged portion when viewed from an external viewpoint. - The
fold line 17 hinging thefirst side panel 18 to themain panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate. Thefold line 17 hinging thefirst side panel 18 to themain panel 12 comprises plurality of curvilinear portions extending substantially between pairs of adjacently disposed article retention structures RT1, RT2. Thefold line 17 defines a plurality of convex hinged portions when viewed from an external viewpoint. - The
fold line 19 hinging thesecond side panel 20 to themain panel 12 is non-linear and may be curvilinear or arcuate. Thefold line 19 hinging thesecond side panel 20 to themain panel 12 comprises plurality of curvilinear portions extending substantially between pairs of adjacently disposed article retention structures RT1, RT2. Thefold line 19 defines a plurality of convex hinged portions when viewed from an external viewpoint. - Each curvilinear hinged portion extends substantially between a pair of
42, 44.tabs - Each
13, 15, 17, 19 curves towards and terminates at, or in close proximity to, a curvilinear hinged connection between a group ofcurved fold line 40 a, 40 b, 40 c; 50 a, 50 b, 50 c.teeth - Each
13, 15, 17, 19 and/or curvilinear hinged connection between a group ofcurved fold line 40 a, 40 b, 40 c; 50 a, 50 b, 50 c terminates at, or in close proximity to, an end of a cut line defining ateeth 42, 44.tab - In the embodiment illustrated in
FIG. 1 , the fold lines 13, 15, 17, 19 are defined by a plurality of spaced apart cut lines. The curvilinear hinged connection between groups of 40 a, 40 b, 40 c; 50 a, 50 b, 50 c and theteeth main panel 12 is defined by a plurality of spaced apart circumferential cut lines 43, 45, 53, 55. A notional extension of the endmost or terminal cutline defining the fold lines 13, 15, 17, 19 intersects or converges with a notional extension of the endmost or terminal cutline defining the curvilinear hinged connection between groups of 40 a, 40 b, 40 c; 50 a, 50 b, 50 c and theteeth main panel 12; in the illustrated embodiment, this is provided by one of the second 45, 55.circumferential cutlines - Each
13, 15, 17, 19 converges with a respective curvilinear hinged connection between a group ofcurved fold line 40 a, 40 b, 40 c; 50 a, 50 b, 50 c at, or in close proximity to, ateeth 42, 44, and may converge at an end of a cut line defining saidtab 42, 44.tab - This may provide the benefit of directing load forces or stresses onto the side wall of the article B so as to increase the structural integrity or rigidity of the
carrier 90; and may be particularly advantageous for impact forces directed at ends or sides of thecarrier 90. - The
13, 15, 17, 19 may create tension, or a bias, in the side or endcurved fold lines 14, 16, 18, 20. This may increase the side or endwalls 14, 16, 18, 20 resistance to impacts.walls - The
13, 15, 17, 19 may create tension or a bias in the side or endcurved fold lines 14, 16, 18, 20 which may have the effect of creating an over-centre or toggle mechanism creating bi-stability—two stable states or positions, a folded stable position and an unfolded stable position. This may facilitate retention of the side or endwalls 14, 16, 18, 20 in a folded condition relative to thewalls main panel 12 either in addition to or alternative to the 42, 44. In this way, the requirement of adhesive or other such fastening means may be negated.tabs - Fold
13, 15, 17, 19 are non-linear such that at least one end portion thereof is curved toward an adjacent annular fold line about one of the article retention structures RT1, RT2 where the annular fold line is defined by the plurality of circumferential cut lines 43, 45, 53, 55.lines - Fold
13, 15, 17, 19 are non-linear such that at least one end portion thereof is curved toward an adjacent engaginglines tooth 40 c. - Fold
13, 15, 17, 19 are non-linear such that at least one end portion thereof is curved toward the adjacent article receiving opening or aperture A1, A2.lines - Fold
17, 19 are curved such a first distance d1 between a terminal end of the fold lines 17, 19 and a second notional line Y-Y oriented longitudinally of the blank 10 and passing through the centres of receiving apertures A1, A2 is less than a second distance d2 where second distance d2 is the maximum distance between the line Y-Y and thelines 17, 19. It will be appreciated that the fold lines 13, 15 are similarly arranged with respect to a first notional line X-X oriented transversely of the blank 10 and passing through the centres of receiving apertures A1.respective fold line - The
first end panel 14 is hingedly connected to themain panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of 13 a, 13 b. The pair offold lines 13 a, 13 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other.fold lines - The
first side panel 18 is hingedly connected to themain panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of 17 a, 17 b. The pair offold lines 17 a, 17 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other.fold lines - The first end of the
first end panel 14 and the first end of thefirst side panel 18 are hinged about afirst corner 12 a of themain panel 12. Thefirst section 13 a of thefold line 13 and thefirst section 17 a of thefold line 17 are convergently arranged with respect to each other and may be obliquely arranged. Thefirst section 13 a of thefold line 13 and thefirst section 17 a of thefold line 17 define, at least in part, a substantially triangular corner portion of themain panel 12 adjacent to a first article retention structure RT1. - The
second end panel 16 is hingedly connected to themain panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of 15 a, 15 b. The pair offold lines 15 a, 15 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other.fold lines - The
second side panel 20 is hingedly connected to themain panel 12 at first and second ends by first and second sections of the hinged connection in the form of a pair of 19 a, 19 b. The pair offold lines fold lines 97 a, 19 b are divergently arranged with respect to each other. - The
main panel 12 comprises four 12 a, 12 b, 12 c, 12 d, each is defined, at least in part, by obliquely arrangedcorner regions 13 a, 17 a; 13 b, 19 a; 15 a, 17 b; 15 b, 19 b.fold line sections - The blank 10 may comprise a handle structure H.
- The handle structure H comprises a handle or finger opening disposed on a longitudinal axis bisecting the
main panel 12. - The handle opening is provided between a group of four article retention structures RT1, RT2. The group of four article retention structures RT1, RT2 is provided medially of the
main panel 12. The handle opening is disposed between a second row of intermediate article retention structures RT2 and a third row of intermediate article retention structures RT2. The handle opening is located at the centre of the second group of four article retention structures RT2. - The handle opening lies, at least in part, between a first column of article retention structures RT1, RT2 and a second column of article retention structures RT1, RT2.
- The handle opening is defined by a plurality of
tabs 60, 62. The handle opening comprises fourtabs 60, 62. Eachtab 60, 62 is hinged to themain panel 12 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. An arcuate or curvilinear cut line may be provided between each fold line to define a corner or vertex of the handle opening. The handle opening is substantially rhombus or diamond shaped, in other embodiments other shapes may be employed such as, but not limited to square. The handle opening comprises a pair of major tabs 60 and a pair ofminor tabs 62. - The pair of major tabs 60 are separated from each other by a first cut line or severable line. The pair of
minor tabs 62 are separated from each other by the first cut line or severable line. - The pair of major tabs 60 are separated from the pair of
minor tabs 62 by a second cut line or severable line. - The first cut line is colinear with a notional line passing transversely though the centre of the group of four intermediate article retention structures RT2.
- The first cut line may be linear in shape and may extend between a first pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening.
- The second cut line may be non-linear in shape and may extend between a second pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening. The second cut line intersects the first cutline, the second cut line comprises a “V” or “U” shaped medial portion; a vertex of the “V” or “U” shaped portion intersects the first cutline.
- One of the pair of major tabs 60 is hinged to the
main panel 12 by a first fold line. The other one of the pair of major tabs 60 is hinged to themain panel 12 by a second fold line. The first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the second fold line. - One of the pair of
minor tabs 62 is hinged to themain panel 12 by a third fold line. The other one of the pair ofminor tabs 62 is hinged to themain panel 12 by a fourth fold line. The third fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line. - The first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the third fold line. The second fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line.
- Each of the pair of major tabs 60 may comprise a fold line extending thereacross. The fold line may be substantially parallel to the fold line hinging the respective one of the pair of major tabs 60 to the
main panel 12. The fold line may extend between the first cut line or severable line and the second cut line or severable line. The fold lines across the pair of major tabs 60 may define a “V” shaped fold arranged in opposition to the V” or “U” shaped medial portion of the second cut line. - The blank 10 may comprise one, two or more alignment or registration devices W1, W2. Each of the registration devices W1, W2 takes the form of a cutaway or recess defining a registration edge of the blank 10 for receiving or engaging a reference pin (discussed in greater detail below). The blank 10 comprises a pair of first registration devices W1 each defining a downstream or leading registration edge. The blank 10 may also comprise a pair of registration devices W2 each defining an upstream or trailing registration edge. Each of the cutaways or recesses defining a registration devices W1, W2 is struck from one of the first and
18, 20.second side panels - The registration devices W1, W2 are disposed so as to be offset—inset—from end edges of the
main panel 12. The end edges of themain panel 12 are defined by 13, 13 a, 13 b, 15, 15 a, 15 b. Insetting the registration devices W1, W2 is advantageous since it allows the tools carrying the reference pin to be more compact, the tools do not extend beyond the footprint of the group of articles in upstream or downstream directions. A notional line N1 passing through the registration edges of the pair of first registration devices W1 passes through the opening and/or aperture A1 of a first pair of first article retention structures RT1. A notional line N2 passing through the registration edges of the pair of second registration devices W2 passes through the opening and/or aperture A1 of a second pair of first article retention structures RT1.fold lines - The blank 10 may comprise at least one stabilisation device M. In the illustrated embodiment, the blank 10 comprises two stabilisation devices M. The stabilization device takes the form of an opening struck from the blank 10. A first stabilisation device M is disposed between first group of four article retention structures RT1, RT2 located proximate a first or leading end edge of the blank 10 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT1, RT2. A second stabilisation device M is disposed between a second group of four article retention structures RT1, RT2 located proximate a second or trailing end edge of the blank 10 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT1, RT2. The stabilisation devices M are configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below).
- The opening of the stabilisation devices M may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped. The opening may be defined by at least one
tab 94 struck from themain panel 12 and hingedly connected thereto. In the illustrated embodiment, the opening is defined by a pair of tabs each struck from themain panel 12 and hingedly connected to themain panel 12 in opposition to each other. The pair oftabs 94 may be separated from each other by a cut or severable line 95. - In some embodiments, the stabilisation devices M may be arranged to provide an additional handle opening. In the embodiment of
FIG. 1 , the stabilisation devices M are generally too small in dimension to accept a finger or portion of a user's finger. This may be advantageous in that a greater amount of substrate material is provided in themain panel 12 between the stabilisation devices M and the openings of article retention structures RT1, RT2, whereby improving the robustness and integrity of thearticle carrier 90. - In other embodiments, the handle opening may be configured for use as a stabilization device. A peg or dog may be provided for engaging the blank 10 via the handle opening to prevent or inhibit linear or rotation movement of the blank 10 with respect to the dog. The dog may be mounted to, or integral with, an applicator device, described in more detail below, for applying the blank 10 to a group of articles B.
- The opening of the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one flat or linear portion for engaging a complementary flat or linear portion of the dog. In other embodiments, the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one generally “V” or “U” shaped portion for engaging a complementary portion of the dog.
- The blank 10 is assembled about a group of articles B. The
main panel 12 of the blank 10 is applied to the group of articles B. Themain panel 12 is lowered with respect to the articles B. Each of the retention structures RT1, RT2 receives one of the articles B. - The blank 10 is folded, about
13, 15, 17, 19, about the sides and ends of the article group to bring the side and end panels into face-to-face relationship therewith.fold lines - The
42, 44 are folded about side walls of a respective article B. Thetabs 42, 44 remain substantially coplanar with the side or endtabs 14, 16, 18, 20 from which they extend. An inner face of thepanel tabs 43, 44 abut a side wall, rim or chime of the articles B. -
FIG. 2 shows the assembledcarrier 90, the 42, 44 abut side walls of the articles B encouraging the side and endtabs 14, 16, 18, 20 into a folded condition.panels - The
12 a, 12 b, 12 c, 12 d of thecorner regions main panel 12 adopt a non-coplanar arrangement with themain panel 12. The 12 a, 12 b, 12 c, 12 d are inclined upwardly as they extend outwardly due to the convergent nature of the fold line pairs 13 a/17 a; 13 b/19 a; 15 a/17 b; 15 b/19 b. This may be beneficial to impart additional strength or rigidity to thecorner regions carrier 90 and reduce the likelihood of deformation when thecarrier 90 is wrapped in a sheet or film of material such as, but not limited to heat or shrink wrap. - In the assembled
carrier 90, each of the 13, 15, 17, 19 couples or joins with the curvilinear hinged connection between an adjacent group ofcurved fold lines 40 a, 40 b, 40 c; 50 a, 50 b, 50 c and theteeth main panel 12. The 13, 15, 17, 19 and curvilinear hinged connection may define or form convergent folds or creases in the substrate forming thecurved fold lines carrier 90. In other embodiments each of the 13, 15, 17, 19 may be coupled or joined to an adjacent curvilinear hinged connection by a third fold or crease. Thecurved fold lines 13, 15, 17, 19 and curvilinear hinged connection meet or join in a location disposed in close proximity to an article B.curved fold lines - In some embodiments, the
13, 15, 17, 19 have the effect of encouraging the side and/or endcurved fold lines 14, 16, 18, 20 to bow outwardly—to be convex when viewed from an external vantage point—in regions between a pair of adjacent articles B.walls - In some embodiments, the
13, 15, 17, 19 have the effect of encouraging thecurved fold lines main panel 12 to bow downwardly—to be concave when viewed from an external vantage point above themain panel 112—in regions between a pair of adjacent articles B. In such embodiments, the side and/or end 14, 16, 18, 20 may be substantially planar.walls - Referring now to
FIGS. 3 and 4 there is shown an alternative blank for use in the packaging system of the present disclosure. In the illustrated embodiment, like numerals have, where possible, been used to denote like parts, albeit with the addition of the prefix “100” to indicate that these features belong to the second embodiment. The alternative embodiment shares many common features with the embodiment ofFIGS. 1 and 2 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated inFIGS. 1 and 2 will be described in any greater detail. -
FIG. 3 shows a blank 110 comprising a plurality of 112, 114A, 214B, 116A, 116B, 118, 120, including apanels main panel 112 for forming a top wall or engaging panel of a carrier 190 (seeFIG. 4 ). - The
main panel 112 comprises at least one article retention structure RT1, RT2. Themain panel 112 comprises a plurality of article retention structures RT1, RT2, specifically eight article retention structures RT1, RT2 arranged in 2×4 matrix or array. Each of the article retention structures RT1, RT2 comprises an opening or aperture A1, A2. - The article retention structures RT1, RT2 of
FIG. 3 are substantially similar to those ofFIG. 1 albeit the 142, 144, 154 are smaller in height dimension relative to thetabs teeth 140 than the 42, 44, 54 oftabs FIG. 1 . - A
first side panel 118 is hingedly connected to a first side of themain panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 117. - A
second side panel 120 is hingedly connected to a second side of themain panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 119. - The blank 110 comprises a first end structure. The first end structure comprises a first upper end panel 114A hingedly connected to a first end of the
main panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 113A. A firstlower end panel 114B is hingedly connected to the first upper end panel 114A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 113B. - The first end structure comprises a
first corner panel 160A hingedly connected to a first end of thefirst side panel 118 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 161A. Asecond corner panel 160B is hingedly connected to a first end of thesecond side panel 120 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 161B. - The first end structure comprises a
first securing panel 164A hingedly connected to thefirst corner panel 160A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 163A. Asecond securing panel 164B is hingedly connected to thesecond corner panel 160B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 163B. - A first web panel 168A is hingedly connected at one end to the
first securing panel 164A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 169A and is hingedly connected at a second end to the first upper end panel 114A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 171A. - A
second web panel 168B is hingedly connected at one end to thesecond securing panel 164B by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 169B and is hingedly connected at a second end to the first upper end panel 114A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 171B. - The blank 110 comprises a second end structure. The second end structure comprises a second
upper end panel 116A hingedly connected to a second end of themain panel 112 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 115A. - A second
lower end panel 116B is hingedly connected to the secondupper end panel 116A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 115B. - The second end structure comprises a
third corner panel 162A hingedly connected to a second end of thefirst side panel 118 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 165A. Afourth corner panel 162B is hingedly connected to a second end of thesecond side panel 120 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 165B. - The first end structure comprises a
third securing panel 166A hingedly connected to thethird corner panel 162A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 167A. Afourth securing panel 166B is hingedly connected to thefourth corner panel 162B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 167B. - A
third web panel 170A is hingedly connected at one end to thethird securing panel 166A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 173A and is hingedly connected at a second end to the secondupper end panel 116A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 175A. - A
fourth web panel 170B is hingedly connected at one end to thefourth securing panel 166B by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 173B and is hingedly connected at a second end to the secondupper end panel 116A by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 175B. - It will be appreciated that the
first side panel 118, thefirst corner panel 160A, thefirst securing panel 164A, thethird corner panel 162A, and thethird securing panel 166A form afirst strap 164A/160A/118/162A/166A along a first side of themain panel 112. Thesecond side panel 120, thesecond corner panel 160B, thesecond securing panel 164B, thefourth corner panel 162B, and thefourth securing panel 166B form asecond strap 164B/160B/120/162B/166B along a second side of themain panel 112. - The blank 110 comprises
first flap 172 hingedly connected to the firstlower end panel 114B by a hinged connection. The hinged connection is defined, at least in part, by a cut line V1. Cut line V1 defines a tab P1 extending from an outer or lower edge of the firstlower end panel 114B. The cut line V1 forms a receiver, in the form of an opening, slot or slit, for receiving a locking tab or detent C1. Each of the first and 164A, 164B comprises a locking tab or detent C1 extending from a lower edge thereof.second securing panels - The
first flap 172 may comprise a pair of 174A, 174B hingedly connected by awing portions 177A, 177B to a central portion of therespective fold line first flap 172. The fold lines 177A, 177B may be divergently arranged with respect to each other, the 177A, 177B diverge towards the firstfold lines lower end panel 114B. - Each of the first and
164A, 164B comprises a cutaway in the form of an aperture A5. Each aperture A5 forms a second receiver for receiving a respective second locking tab or detent C2. The first upper end panel 114A comprises a pair ofsecond securing panels cut lines 101, each of which is substantially “U” shaped, eachcut line 101 defines a respective detent C2. - The blank 110 comprises
second flap 176 hingedly connected to the secondlower end panel 116B by a hinged connection. The hinged connection is defined, at least in part, by a cut line V2. Cut line V2 defines a second tab P2 extending from an outer or lower edge of the secondlower end panel 116B. The cut line V2 forms a receiver, in the form of an opening, slot or slit, for receiving a locking tab or detent C2. Each of the third and 166A, 166B comprises a locking tab or detent C2 extending from a lower edge thereof.fourth securing panels - The
second flap 176 may comprise a pair of 178A, 178B hingedly connected by awing portions 178A, 178B to a central portion of therespective fold line second flap 176. The fold lines 179A, 179B may be divergently arranged with respect to each other, the 179A, 179B diverge towards the secondfold lines lower end panel 116B. - Each of the third and
166A, 166B comprises a cutaway in the form of an aperture A5. Each aperture A5 forms a second receiver for receiving a respective second locking tab or detent C2. The secondfourth securing panels upper end panel 116A comprises a pair ofcut lines 101, each of which is substantially “U” shaped, eachcut line 101 defines a respective detent C2. - The end structures are folded to secure the first and
118, 120 about sides of a group of articles B. The blank 110 can be applied to the group of articles B in a flat form and folded thereabout.second side panels - The
main panel 112 is lowered with respect to a group of articles B. The first and 118, 120 are folded about the opposing sides of the group of articles B. Thesecond side panels 160A, 160B, 162A, 162B are folded about the corners of the group of articles B and the securingcorner panels 164A, 164B, 166A, 166B are folded about ends of the group of articles B.panels - The first and second
upper end panels 114A, 116A are folded downwards about a respective end of the group of articles B. The first and second 114B, 116B are folded upwardly with respect to the first and secondlower end panels upper end panels 114A, 116A such that the detents C2 can be inserted into the apertures A5. The first and second 114B, 116B are folded downwardly to return to a substantially coplanar relationship with the respective one of the first and secondlower end panels upper end panels 114A, 116A to which they are hinged. - The first and
172, 176 are folded internally, thesecond flaps 174A, 174B, 176A, 176B are folded with respect to the central portion so as to pass the side walls of adjacently disposed articles B, as shown inwing portion FIG. 8 . - The blank 110 may comprise at least one, and may comprise at least two, alignment or registration devices W1, W2. Each of the registration devices W1, W2 takes the form of a cutaway or recess defining a registration edge of the blank 110 for receiving or engaging a reference pin (discussed in greater detail below). The blank 110 comprises a pair of first registration devices W1 each defining a downstream or leading registration edge. The blank 110 may also comprise a pair of registration devices W2 each defining an upstream or trailing registration edge. Each of the cutaways or recesses defining a registration devices W1, W2 is struck from one of the first and
118, 120.second side panels - The blank 110 may comprise at least one stabilisation device M. In the illustrated embodiment, the blank 110 comprises two stabilisation devices M. The stabilization device takes the form of an opening struck from the blank 110. A first stabilisation device M is disposed between first group of four article retention structures RT1, RT2 located proximate a first or leading end edge of the blank 110 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT1, RT2. A second stabilisation device M is disposed between a second group of four article retention structures RT1, RT2 located proximate a second or trailing end edge of the blank 110 and may be disposed centrally between said group of article retention structures RT1, RT2. The stabilisation devices M are configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below).
- The opening of the stabilisation devices M may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped. The opening may be defined by at least one
tab 194 struck from themain panel 112 and hingedly connected thereto. In the illustrated embodiment, the opening is defined by a pair of tabs each struck from themain panel 112 and hingedly connected to themain panel 112 in opposition to each other. The pair oftabs 194 may be separated from each other by a cut orseverable line 195. - In some embodiments, the stabilisation devices M may be arranged to provide an additional handle opening. In the embodiment of
FIG. 3 , the stabilisation devices M are generally too small in dimension to accept a finger or portion thereof of a user's finger. This may be advantageous in that a greater amount of substrate material is provided in themain panel 112 between the stabilisation devices M and the of article retention structures RT1, RT2, whereby improving the robustness and integrity of thearticle carrier 190. - Referring now to
FIGS. 5A, 5B, and 6 there is shown an alternative blank for use in the packaging system of the present disclosure. In the illustrated embodiment, like numerals have, where possible, been used to denote like parts, albeit with the addition of the prefix “300” to indicate that these features belong to the third embodiment. The alternative embodiment shares many common features with the embodiments ofFIGS. 1 to 4 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated inFIGS. 1 to 4 will be described in any greater detail. - Referring to
FIG. 5A there is shown a blank 310 comprising a plurality of 312, 314, 316, 318, 320, including apanels main panel 312 for forming a lower wall or engaging panel of a carrier 390 (seeFIG. 6 ). - A
first side panel 314 is hingedly connected to a first side of themain panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 313. A first top orcover panel 318 is hingedly connected to thefirst side panel 314 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 317. - A
second side panel 316 is hingedly connected to a second side of themain panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 315. A second top orcover panel 320 is hingedly connected to thesecond side panel 316 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 319. - The
main panel 312 of the blank 310 includes at least one article retention structure RT1, RT2. Themain panel 312 comprises a plurality of article retention structures RT1, RT2, specifically eight article retention structures RT1, RT2 arranged in 2×4 matrix or array. Each of the article retention structures RT1, RT2 comprises an opening or aperture A1, A2. The article retention structures RT1, RT2 are substantially similar to those shown inFIGS. 3 and 4 and will not be described in further detail. - The
main panel 312 comprises a handle structure. The handle structure may comprise at least one handle opening A3. In the illustrated embodiment, the blank 310 comprises three handle openings A2. Each handle opening A3 is defined in or struck from a region of themain panel 312 disposed centrally between four apertures A1, A2 arranged as two adjacent pairs of apertures A1, A2. - The first and second
318, 320 are arranged to be disposed in at least partially overlapping relationship with each other. The overlapping portions of the first and secondtop panels 318, 320 are provided with a locking structure for locking the first and secondtop panels 318, 320. The locking structure cooperates with the handle openings in thetop panels main panel 312 to secure the first and second 318, 320 to thetop panels main panel 312. - The locking structure comprises at least one receiver RC in the form of an opening in the first
top panel 318. The firsttop panel 318 comprises a plurality of openings, more specifically three openings, although in other embodiments one, two or more than three openings may be provided. Each of the openings is arranged to be in vertical registry or alignment with a handle opening A3 provided in themain panel 312. The openings may be defined by at least one tab 392, 394, 396 (also referred to herein as female tabs or receiver tabs). In the illustrated embodiment, the openings are defined by three tabs 392, 394, 396. The openings may be substantially square or diamond shaped, In the illustrated embodiment, the corners of the opening are rounded or filleted. A first tab 396 is hinged to the firsttop panel 318 by a first hinged connection in the form of a first fold line 391. A second tab 392 is hinged to the firsttop panel 318 by a second hinged connection in the form of a second fold line 393. The second tab 392 is hinged to the firsttop panel 318 in opposition to the first tab 396. The first tab 396 is separated in part from the second tab 392 by a first severance line or cut line 397 and in part by a third tab 394. The third tab 394 is defined by a second severance line or cut line 399. The second cut line 399 is substantially ‘U’ shaped. The third tab 394 is hinged to the firsttop panel 318 by a third hinged connection in the form of a third fold line 395. The third hinged connection is disposed adjacent to the first and/or second hinged connection, and may be substantially orthogonal thereto. The third tab 394 defines a cut-out or recess in each of the first and second tabs 396, 392. The cut-out or recess is struck from a free end edge opposing the first and second hinged connections respectively. - The locking structure comprises at least one locking element L for being received in the receiver RC. The locking element L comprises a
tab 380 struck from the secondtop panel 320, the illustrated embodiment comprises threetabs 380 each arranged to be engageable with one of the receiver openings and a respective one of the handle openings A2. Eachtab 380 is hinged to the secondtop panel 320 by a hingedconnection 381. Eachtab 380 may comprise at least one fold line. In the illustrated embodiment, thetab 380 comprises a pair of fold lines. The pair of fold lines may be divergently arranged with respect to each other. Each of the pair of fold lines may be non-linear in shape for example but not limited to arcuate or curvilinear in shape. - The nonlinear fold lines may encourage the
tab 380 to return to a planar arrangement so as to increase security of thetab 380 within the receiver and the handle opening A3. - The
tab 380 may be substantially ‘arrow head’ shaped so as to define a pair of opposing shoulders or detents for securely engaging the handle opening A3 and/or receiver RC. - The first
top panel 318, secondtop panel 320, first and 314, 316 andsecond side panels main panel 312 form a tubular structure. Each end of the tubular structure is closed by an end closure structure. A first end closure structure comprises afirst end panel 324 hingedly connected to a first end of themain panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 325. A firsttop end flap 326 is hingedly connected to thefirst end panel 324 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 327. - A
first anchor flap 322A is hingedly connected to a first end of the firsttop panel 318 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 323A. Thefirst anchor flap 322A is hingedly connected to the firsttop end flap 326 by a pair of hinged 328A, 330A. The pair of hingedpanels 328A, 330A form a gusset. A first connectingpanels panel 328A is hingedly connected to thefirst anchor flap 322A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. A second connectingpanel 330A is hingedly connected to the first connectingpanel 328A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. The second connectingpanel 330A is hingedly connected to the firsttop end flap 326 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. - A
second anchor flap 322B is hingedly connected to a first end of the secondtop panel 320 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 323B. Thesecond anchor flap 322B is hingedly connected to the firsttop end flap 326 by a pair of hinged 328B, 330B forming a second gusset. A third connectingpanels panel 328B is hingedly connected to thesecond anchor flap 322B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. A fourth connectingpanel 330B is hingedly connected to the third connectingpanel 328B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. The fourth connectingpanel 330B is hingedly connected to the firsttop end flap 326 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. - The
first end panel 324 is separated from each of the first and second anchor flaps 322A, 322B by an aperture A10. The apertures A10 separate each of the pair of hingedpanels 328A/330A, 328B/330B from the respective one of the first and 314, 316.second side panels - A second end closure structure comprises a
second end panel 334 hingedly connected to a second end of themain panel 312 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 335. A secondtop end flap 336 is hingedly connected to thesecond end panel 334 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 337. - A
third anchor flap 332A is hingedly connected to a second end of the firsttop panel 318 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 333A. Thethird anchor flap 332A is hingedly connected to the secondtop end flap 336 by a pair of hinged 338A, 340A forming a third gusset. A fifth connectingpanels panel 338A is hingedly connected to thethird anchor flap 332A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. A sixth connectingpanel 340A is hingedly connected to the fifth connectingpanel 338A by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. The sixth connectingpanel 340A is hingedly connected to the secondtop end flap 336 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. - A
fourth anchor flap 332B is hingedly connected to a second end of the secondtop panel 320 by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 333B. Thefourth anchor flap 332B is hingedly connected to the secondtop end flap 336 by a pair of hinged 338B, 340B forming a fourth gusset. A seventh connectingpanels panel 338B is hingedly connected to thefourth anchor flap 332B by a hinged connection in the form of afold line 339B (seeFIG. 5B ). An eighth connectingpanel 340B is hingedly connected to the seventh connectingpanel 338B by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 355B. The eighth connectingpanel 340B is hingedly connected to the secondtop end flap 336 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line 359B. - The
second end panel 334 is separated from each of the third and fourth anchor flaps 332A, 332B by an aperture A10. The apertures A10 separate each of the pair of hingedpanels 338A/340A, 338B/340B from the respective one of the first and 314, 316.second side panels - The blank 310 may comprise at least two alignment or registration devices W1, W2. Each of the registration devices W1, W2 takes the form of a cutaway or recess defining a registration edge of the blank 310 for receiving or engaging a reference pin (discussed in greater detail below). The blank 310 comprises a pair of first registration devices W1 each defining a downstream or leading registration edge. The blank 310 may also comprise a second pair of registration devices W2 each defining an upstream or trailing registration edge. Each of the cutaways or recesses defining a registration device W1, W2 is struck from, or defined in, one of the first and second
318, 320.top panels - The blank 310 may comprise at least one stabilisation device. In the illustrated embodiment, the blank 110 comprises three stabilisation devices. Each stabilization device comprises an opening in at least one of the first
top panel 318, secondtop panel 320, and themain panel 312. Each stabilization device may comprise an opening in at least two, or all, of the firsttop panel 318, secondtop panel 320, and themain panel 312. Each stabilisation device is configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below). - An opening forming at least part of the stabilisation device may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped. The opening or openings in the panels providing the stabilisation device may be defined by at least one tab struck from the panel in which it is formed and hingedly connected thereto.
- In the illustrated embodiment, an opening is defined in part by a pair of
370, 372 each struck from the firsttabs top panel 318 and hingedly connected to the firsttop panel 318 in opposition to each other. The pair of 370, 372 may be separated from each other by a cut ortabs severable line 377. - A first stabilisation device is arranged to be disposed in vertical registration with a gap or void between a first group of four articles being packaged within the
carrier 390. A second stabilisation device is arranged to be disposed in vertical registration with a gap or void between a second group of four articles. A third stabilisation device is arranged to be disposed in vertical registration with a gap or void between a third group of four articles. - Turning to the construction of the
carrier 390 from the blank 310, the blank 310 may be formed into an assembledcarrier 390, as shown inFIG. 6 . - The blank 310 is applied to a group of articles B. The blank 310 is lowered with respect to a group of articles B. Each of the article retention structures RT1, RT2 of the blank 310 is aligned with a respective article B in the group. Portions of the articles B pass through the
main panel 312. The toothed regions of themain panel 312 about each of the article retention structures RT1, RT2 may be folded out of the plane of themain panel 312. - Each toothed region of the
main panel 312 may be folded about one of the articles B received in the respective one of the article retention structures RT1, RT2. Themain panel 312 may deform about the article B for example but not limited to a shoulder portion of the article B, where the article B is a can the shoulder portion may be provide by the neck-in. - The blank 310 may be partially folded about
313, 315 to bring the first andfold lines 314, 316 into non-coplanar relationship with thesecond side panels main panel 312. - The blank 310 is folded about
323A, 323B, 333A, 333B to fold the first, second, third and fourth anchor flaps 322A, 322B, 332A, 332B into substantially face to face relationship with the first orfold lines 314, 316 to which they are hinged.second side panels - The blank 310 is folded about
325, 335 to fold the first andfold lines 324, 334 into substantially at least perpendicular relationship with thesecond end panels main panel 312. In some embodiments the first and 324, 334 may be folded through an angle greater than 90° so as to be inclined.second end panels - The blank 310 is folded about
327, 337 to fold the first and second top end flaps 326, 336 with respect to the respective one of the first andfold lines 324, 334 to which they are hinged.second end panels - The first and second top end flaps 326, 336 may be folded over an upper end of an article B or articles B disposed adjacent to the first and second ends of the
main panel 312. - The first and second top end flaps 326, 336 may be folded to be substantially parallel to the
main panel 312. - The first and
324, 334 and first and second top end flaps 326, 336 may be folded automatically in response to folding the first, second, third and fourth anchor flaps 322A, 322B, 332A, 332B into substantially face contacting relationship with the respective one of the first andsecond end panels 314, 316.second side panels - The blank 310 is folded about
313, 315 to bring the first andfold lines 314, 316 into substantially perpendicular relationship with thesecond side panels main panel 312. - The blank 310 is folded about
fold line 317 to fold the firsttop panel 318 over the tops of the articles B. The blank 310 is folded aboutfold line 319 to fold the secondtop panel 320 over the tops of the articles B and into overlapping relationship with the firsttop panel 318 to form a compositetop panel 318/320. - The locking
tabs 380 are displaced out of the plane of the secondtop panel 320, downwardly so as to pass through a respective one of the receiver openings. The receiver tabs 392, 394, 396 displaced out of the plane of the firsttop panel 318 as a consequence. - The locking
tabs 380 are engaged with the first and second receiver tabs 396, 392. Shoulders of thelocking tab 380 may engage not only with the perimeter of the respective handle opening A3 but also with an edge of each of the first and second receiver tabs 396, 392. The shoulders of thelocking tab 380 engage with an edge of each of the first and second receiver tabs 396, 392 defined by a cutaway or recess in the free edge opposing their hinged connections 391, 393 to the firsttop panel 318. - The recessed edges of the first and second receiver tabs 396, 392 prevent or inhibit disengagement of the locking
tabs 380 from the locked condition with the first and second receiver tabs 396, 392. - The locking
tabs 380 and the receiver tabs 396, 392 may also serve to function as a spacer between the compositetop panel 318/320 and themain panel 312. The lockingtabs 380 may engage themain panel 312 along the perimeters of the handle openings A3 and/or the lower surface of themain panel 312 and may thereby serve as tension members for maintaining a spacing between themain panel 312 and the compositetop panel 318/320 so as to prevent the spacing from increasing. Additionally, the receiver tabs 396, 392 and/or the lockingtabs 380 may engage or abut with the inside or upper surface of themain panel 312 and may thereby brace between the compositetop panel 318/320 and themain panel 312 to maintain a spacing therebetween so as to assist in preventing the spacing from decreasing. Thus, at least a portion of thelocking tab 380 and/or at least a portion of one or more of the receiver tabs 396, 392 may be disposed between the firsttop panel 318 and themain panel 312 to maintain a spacing therebetween. - The
locking tab 380 may also provide a cushioning tab improving comfort when thepackage 390 is carried by inserting one or more fingers into the openings in the compositetop panel 318/320 and themain panel 312. - The first and second receiver tabs 396, 392 when folded may extend through the handle openings A3.
- The locking
tabs 380 may also engage with themain panel 312, passing through a respective one of the handle openings A3. The shoulders of thelocking tab 380 may engage with an underside of themain panel 312; the underside being a second side of themain panel 312 opposing a first side through which thelocking tab 380 was received. - The third tab 394 may provide a biasing mechanism. The third tab 394 has natural or inherent tendency to return to the unfolded condition. This may provide, or supplement, the resilient bias of the
locking tab 380 to return to an unfolded condition. The third tab 394 encourages the lockingtabs 380 towards an end stop defined by the recessed edge of the first and second receiver tabs 396, 392. The end stop inhibits or prevents thelocking tab 380 from returning to the unfolded condition. -
FIGS. 7 to 12 illustrate embodiments of a 400, 500, 600 forming part of a packaging machine for assembling thepackaging apparatus blanks 10; 110; 310 ofFIGS. 1 to 6 about a group of articles B. -
FIGS. 7 to 10 show views of apackaging apparatus 400 adapted to assemble the blank 110 ofFIG. 3 .FIG. 11 shows a view of apackaging apparatus 500 adapted to assemble the blank 310 ofFIG. 5 .FIG. 12 shows a view of apackaging apparatus 600 adapted to assemble the blank 10 ofFIG. 1 . - Returning to
FIG. 7 there is shown apackaging apparatus 400 comprising a grouping and metering apparatus and anapplicator 420 for applying the blank 110 to a metered group of articles (not shown inFIG. 7 ,FIG. 8 shows the articles B, andFIG. 9 shows the position of the articles B in phantom lines). - The metering apparatus comprises a first plurality of
432A, 432B, 434 for engaging, metering, and driving a first column of articles B through thearticle engaging tools packaging apparatus 400. The metering apparatus comprises a second plurality of 432A, 432B, 434 for engaging, metering, and driving a second column of articles B through thearticle engaging tools packaging apparatus 400. The second plurality of 432A, 432B, 434 is arranged in opposition to the first plurality ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434.article engaging tools - Each of the
432A, 432B, 434 is coupled to, or comprises, a drive mechanism to propel each of the first and second plurality ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 about a respective track or loop.article engaging tools - Each of the
432A, 432B, 434 is coupled to, or mounted to, a track a respective track or loop (not shown) having a working reach and a return reach. Thearticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 may comprise a magnet (not shown) for holding thearticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 to the track. The track comprises a drive mechanism for driving thearticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 about the track. The drive mechanism may take the form of a linear motor. A stator comprising coils is mounted to the track and generates propulsive force by acting upon the magnet to drive thearticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 about the track. Each of thearticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 can be independently or individually controlled, In this way, the pitch betweenarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 can be varied and thearticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 can be individually accelerated or decelerated.article engaging tools - Each
432A, 432B, 434 in the first plurality ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 is driven in synchronicity with a respective one of thearticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 in the second plurality ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434, at least through a working reach of thearticle engaging tools 400, 500, 600.packaging apparatus - The
packaging apparatus 400 may merge a first stream of articles B with a second stream of articles B, the first plurality of 432A, 432B, 434 engaging articles from the first stream and the second plurality ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 engaging articles from the second stream.article engaging tools - Each
432A, 432B, 434 comprises aarticle engaging tool carriage 448 having at least one wheel orfollower 446, in some embodiments two, three, four or more wheels orfollowers 446 may be provided on eachcarriage 448 and engage with the track. - Each
carriage 448 comprises ahead 442 detachably mounted thereto by asecuring mechanism 444. In some embodiments, thelock mechanism 444 may take the form of a bayonet style fitting or mount. In this way, thehead 442 is readily separated from thecarriage 448 and may be interchanged, swapped or replaced. This allows thehead 442 to be changed for a different head to accommodate a different carton blank 10; 110; 310 or article B or to enable replacement of a damaged or broken head. - Each of the
heads 442 comprises a gripper or scoop 443 providing at least one engaging surface for engaging an article B. Thegripper 443 comprises a pair of fingers or limbs defining a recess or channel arranged to accommodate a portion of the article B. - Each of the
heads 442 may comprise a reference pin or post 440 extending upwardly therefrom. Thereference pin 440 is mounted to thehead 442 at a first proximal end and extends upwardly to a distal free end. The distal free end is disposed at an elevation above the upper end of the articles B. In this way, thereference pin 440 is configured to engage with a blank 110 when placed upon the upper ends of the articles B in the group of articles B. Theheads 442 forming leading and trailing 432A, 432B may comprise a first reference pin or post 440. Thearticle engaging tools heads 442 forming intermediatearticle engaging tools 434 may comprise an optional second reference pin or post 440′. The second reference pin or post 440′ may be offset with respect to the first reference pins 440 provided by the leading and trailing 432A, 432B, best illustrated inarticle engaging tools FIG. 8 . - The
reference pin 440 is arranged to be located between a leading portion of thehead 442 and a trailing portion of thehead 442. Thereference pin 440 is located upstream of a downstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by thehead 442 to which it is mounted and thereference pin 440 is located downstream of an upstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by saidhead 442. - The
reference pin 440 may be disposed within the footprint of thecarriage 448 and/orhead 442. In this way, twoadjacent carriages 448 orhead 442 can be brought into close proximity without interference by thereference pin 440 or its mounting. This enables two or more 432A, 432B, 434 to bring two or more articles B into close proximity or to engage two or more articles B which are disposed in close proximity.article engaging tools - In order to form a metered group of articles B pairs of
432A, 432B, 434 bring together pairs of articles B, one from each of the first and second columns or streams of articles B.article engaging tools - Two or more pairs of
432A, 432B, 434 may be employed to form a group of articles B, in the illustrated embodiment four pairs ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 form a group of eight articles B in a 2×4 matrix or array.article engaging tools - In order to form the group, the leading pair of
article engaging tools 432B may be retarded to allow the intermediate pairs ofarticle engaging tools 434, and the trailing pair ofarticle engaging tools 432A to catch up with the pair of 432A, 432B, 434 disposed downstream thereof. Once each upstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 catch the adjacent downstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434, they too may be retarded to match the speed of said downstream pair. In alternative embodiments, it will be appreciated that speed of an upstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434 may be increased or accelerated to catch an adjacent downstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434.article engaging tools - As the
432A, 432B, 434 form the group of articles B a blank 110 is lowered onto the upper ends of the articles B forming the group.article engaging tools - The blank 110 is lowered or fed from above by an overhead conveyor (not shown) and is moved in the downstream direction with the articles B, the leading registration edges provided by the pair of first registration devices W1 are brought into contact with the
reference pin 440 of respective ones of the leading pair ofarticle engaging tools 432B. - When the trailing pair of
article engaging tools 432A completes formation of the group of articles B thereference pin 440 of respective ones of the trailing pair ofarticle engaging tools 432A are brought into contact with the trailing registration edges provided by the pair of second registration devices W2. The blank 110 is confined between the reference pins 440 of the leading and trailing 432B, 432A. The reference pins 440 ensure the blank is correctly aligned with respect to the group of article B and maintains this alignment as the blank 110 and articles B move in a downstream direction through the packaging machine.article engaging tools - It will be appreciated that in some embodiments only one of the trailing pair of
article engaging tools 432A and one of the leading pair ofarticle engaging tools 432B may comprise areference pin 440; said reference pins 440 being disposed on diagonally opposed ones of the trailing pair ofarticle engaging tools 432A and leading pair ofarticle engaging tools 432B. - The reference pins 440′ (when provided) of the intermediate pairs of
article engaging tools 434 may contact or engage side edges S1, S2 of the blank 110 to further support alignment of the blank 110 with respect to the group of articles B. - The reference pins 440, 440′ each engage a
118, 120 hingedly connected to the main or engagingpanel panel 112. The 118, 120 is folded about a side or end of the article group, in doing so thepanel 118, 120, in particular the registration edges, are disengaged from the reference pins 440, 440′.panel - The
packaging apparatus 400 comprises anapplicator 420 for effecting folding of the 118, 120 with respect to the main or engagingpanel panel 112. - The
applicator 420 comprises aplate 421, a lower or engaging surface of theplate 421 comprises a plurality of recesses or orifices each adapted to receive an upper portion of an article B. The illustrated embodiment comprises eight orifices arranged in 2×4 matrix or array. - The
plate 421 comprises one or more folding dies or 452A, 452B depending from the lower or engaging surface of thebrakes plate 421. The folding dies or 452A, 452B effect folding of thebrakes 118, 120 with respect to the main or engagingside panels panel 112. - The
plate 421 comprises one or more retention or stabilising pins or lugs 450 depending from the lower or engaging surface of theplate 421. The illustrated embodiment comprises three stabilisingpins 450, best shown inFIG. 9 . - The stabilising pins 450 are longer in length than the folding dies 452A, 452B, so as to extend therebelow. The stabilising pins 450 are the first parts of the
applicator 420 to engage the blank 110. The stabilising pins 450, also referred to herein as abutment pegs, are received by a respective stabilisation device M. The stabilising pins 450 are inserted into the opening of the stabilisation device M, thetabs 94 when present are folded out of the plane of themain panel 112 as the stabilising pins 450 are received. The stabilising pins 450 prevent or inhibit movement of the blank 110 with respect to theapplicator 420 and retain the blank 110 in correct alignment with the articles B as the 18, 120 are folded about the sides of the article group.side panels - The
applicator 420 is lowered with respect to the articles B so as to press the blank 110 over the upper ends of the articles B. Theapplicator 420 is brought into contact with the blank 110, the stabilising pins 450 are received by the stabilisation devices M, the 118, 120 are folded downwardly,side panels applicator 420 is lowered further and presses the blank 110 downwardly such that an article B is received in each of the article retention structures RT1, RT2. The 140, 142, 144, 154 are folded out of the plane of the engagingtabs panel 112 and engage below a flange or other suitable projection provided on the articles B. -
FIG. 11 shows a view of apackaging apparatus 500 adapted to assemble the blank 310 ofFIG. 5 . Thepackaging apparatus 500 comprisesheads 542 which have been adapted to accommodate the blank 310. In particular theheads 542 comprisereference pins 540 which are disposed further from theengaging surface 543 of thehead 542 than those of thehead 442 of the embodiment ofFIGS. 7 to 10 . In the illustrated embodiment, thesecuring mechanism 544 is disposed between theengaging surface 543 of thehead 542 and thereference pin 540. In the embodiment ofFIGS. 7 to 10 , thereference pin 440 is disposed between the securingmechanism 444 and theengaging surface 443 of thehead 442. - The
heads 542 ofFIG. 11 and theheads 442 ofFIGS. 7 to 10 may be interchangeable, that is to say the head may be selected depending upon the blank being packaged. Thecarriage 448 and thecarriage 548 may be substantially similar such that eitherhead 542 orhead 442 can be mounted thereto. - Referring now to
FIG. 12 there is shown a view of apackaging apparatus 600 adapted to assemble the blank 10 ofFIG. 1 . - The
applicator 620 comprises a pair of first stabilising pegs or pins 650 adapted to be received in the opening of the stabilisation devices M. - The
applicator 620 comprises an optional second stabilising peg or pin 654 adapted to be received in the handle opening of the handle structure H. Thesecond stabilising peg 654 is shaped and dimensioned to fit the handle opening and may be wider, or larger in diameter, than the first stabilising pegs 650. - In some embodiments, the pair of first stabilising pegs or pins 650 may be omitted and only the second stabilising peg or pin 654 may be provided, the second stabilising peg or pin 654 may be shaped to prevent or inhibit rotation of the blank with respect to the
applicator 620 when the second stabilising peg or pin 654 is received in a stabilising device provided by the blank 10. - The
applicator 620 comprises one or more first folding dies or brakes depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate. The folding dies or brakes effect folding of the 18, 20 with respect to the main or engagingside panels panel 12. - The
applicator 620 comprises one or more second folding dies or brakes 652C, 652C depending from the lower or engaging surface of the plate. The folding dies or brakes effect folding of the 14, 16 with respect to the main or engagingend panels panel 12. - The
applicator 620 is mounted to an overhead wheel which is adapted to maintain the orientation of theapplicator 620 with respect to a conveyor (not shown). Theapplicator 620 is maintained substantially parallel with the conveyor, such that the engaging surface of the plate faces towards the articles B and/or conveyor throughout the rotation of the overhead wheel. - Referring now to
FIGS. 13 to 19 there is shown alternative embodiments of a packaging system, article carriers and blanks, apparatus and applicators of the present disclosure. The alternative embodiments share many common features with the embodiments ofFIGS. 1 to 12 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated inFIGS. 1 to 12 will be described in any greater detail. - Referring to
FIG. 13 , there is shown a plan view of a pair ofconnected blanks 401 each of which is capable of forming a carton orcarrier 490, as shown inFIG. 17 , for containing and carrying a group of primary products such as, but not limited to, bottles or cans, hereinafter referred to as articles B, as shown inFIG. 17 . - In the illustrated embodiments, the
410A, 410B; are configured to form a carton orblanks carrier 490 for packaging an exemplary arrangements of exemplary articles B. In the embodiment illustrated inFIG. 13 , each blank 410A, 410B is configured to package article in a 2×2 matrix or array arrangement—two rows of two articles B are provided—and the articles B are beverage cans. - Alternatively, the
410A, 410B may be configured to form a carrier for packaging other types, number and size of articles and/or for packaging articles in a different arrangement or configuration.blanks - Referring to
FIG. 13 there is shown a pair ofconnected blanks 401 comprising a first blank 410A and a second blank 410B. The second blank 410B is severable or frangibly connected to the first blank 410A by afrangible connection 413. Each of the 410A, 410B comprises a main or engagingblanks panel 412 for forming a top wall or an engaging panel of acarrier 490. - The
frangible connection 413 may take the form of a plurality of cutlines spaced apart to define connecting nick or bridge portions N1, N2, N3, N4 therebetween. The bridge portions N1, N2, N3, N4 couple the first blank 410A to the second blank 410B. In the illustrated embodiment, thefrangible connection 413 comprises four connecting nick or bridge portions N1, N2, N3, N4 arranged in pairs N1/N2, N3/N4. A first pair of connecting nicks N1/N2 is disposed between a first article retention structure RT in the first blank 410A and a second article retention structure RT in the second blank 410B. The second article retention structure RT is disposed adjacent to the first article retention structure RT and each lies upon a notional longitudinal line or axis x-x, the longitudinal line or axis x-x passing through the centre of each of the first and second article retention structures RT. The first pair of connecting nicks N1/N2 are disposed on opposite sides of the longitudinal line x-x. The longitudinal line x-x may define or pass through a region of closest proximity between an article B received in the first blank 410A and an article B received in the second blank 410B. Thefrangible connection 413 comprises a second pair of connecting nicks N3/N4 disposed between a third article retention structure RT in the first blank 410A and a fourth article retention structure RT in the second blank 410B. The second pair of connecting nicks N3/N4 are disposed on opposing sides of a notional line (not shown) extending longitudinally of the pair ofconnected blanks 401 and passing through the centres of each of the third and fourth article retention structures RT. - The
main panels 412 include at least one article retention structure RT. In the illustrated embodiment, themain panels 412 each comprise a plurality of article retention structures RT specifically four article retention structures RT arranged in 2×2 matrix or array. Each of themain panels 412 comprises two columns of article retention structures RT, each column comprises two article retention structures RT. Each of the article retention structures RT comprises an aperture A1. - Each of the article retention structures RT is substantially similar in construction and will therefore be described in detail with reference to a first one of the article retention structures RT located adjacent to a first end of the second blank 410B as shown in
FIG. 13 . - The article retention structure RT comprises an article receiving opening defined in part by an aperture A1.
- The article retention structure RT comprises a plurality of engaging
teeth 440 disposed about the aperture A1. - The plurality of
teeth 440 are hinged to themain panel 412 by a fold line. The fold line may be defined by a plurality of 443, 445. The plurality ofcut lines 443, 445 may define or approximate a circle.cut lines - Each of the plurality of
teeth 440 comprises an engaging edge E1 opposing a hinged edge. The engaging edges E1 are defined by a linear portion of a cut line defining the aperture A1. Each engaging edge E1 defines a part of a polygon. The illustrated embodiment comprises sixteenteeth 440. Eachtooth 440 comprises a pair of side edges, the side edges are defined bycut lines 441 extending radially outward from respective vertices of the polygon. That is to say from a respective vertex between a pair of adjacent linear portions of the cut line defining the aperture A1. The cut lines 441 are divergently arranged with respect to each other and define an angle therebetween, the angle may be about 22.5°. - The article retention structure RT may comprise a plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443. Each of the plurality of first
circumferential cut lines 443 is aligned with one of theradial cut lines 441 such that said one of theradial cut lines 441 or a notional extension thereof bisects a respective one of the plurality of first circumferential cut lines 443. - Each of the plurality of first
circumferential cut lines 443 is spaced apart from said one of theradial cut lines 441 bisecting it so as to define a connecting nick or bridge portion between a pair of adjacently disposedteeth 440. - Each of the plurality of first
circumferential cut lines 443 may be linear in shape. - The article retention structure RT may comprise a plurality of second circumferential cut lines 445. Each of the plurality of second
circumferential cut lines 445 is disposed between a pair of the plurality of firstcircumferential cut lines 443 and is spaced apart therefrom so as to define a pair of connecting nick or bridge portions between eachtooth 440 and themain panel 412. The pair of connecting nick or bridge portions provide a hinged or foldable connection between eachtooth 440 and themain panel 412. - Each of the plurality of second
circumferential cut lines 445 may be linear in shape. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of firstcircumferential cut lines 443 may be arcuate or curved. In alternative embodiments, each of the plurality of secondcircumferential cut lines 445 may be arcuate or curved. - In the illustrated embodiment, the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of second
circumferential cut lines 445 is equal to the radius of curvature of each of the plurality of firstcircumferential cut lines 443 however in other embodiments it may be different. - The
410A, 410B comprise a handle structure H. The handle structure H comprises a handle or finger opening disposed on a longitudinal axis bisecting theblanks main panel 412. The handle opening is provided between a group of four article retention structures RT. The handle opening is provided centrally or medially of themain panel 412. - Each handle opening is defined by a plurality of
tabs 460, 462. The handle openings comprise fourtabs 460, 462. Eachtab 460, 462 is hinged to themain panel 412 by a hinged connection in the form of a fold line. An arcuate or curvilinear cut line may be provided between each fold line to define a corner or vertex of the handle opening. The handle openings are substantially rhombus or diamond shaped, in other embodiments other shapes may be employed such as, but not limited to square. The handle openings comprise a pair ofmajor tabs 460 and a pair of minor tabs 462. - The pair of
major tabs 460 are separated from each other by a first cut line or severable line. The pair of minor tabs 462 are separated from each other by the first cut line or severable line. The pair ofmajor tabs 460 are separated from the pair of minor tabs 462 by a second cut line or severable line. - The first cut line is colinear with a notional line passing longitudinally though the centre of the group of four article retention structures RT.
- The first cut line may be linear in shape and may extend between a first pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening. The second cut line may be non-linear in shape and may extend between a second pair of opposed vertices of the handle opening. The second cut line intersects the first cutline, the second cut line comprises a “V” or “U” shaped medial portion; a vertex of the “V” or “U” shaped portion intersects the first cutline.
- One of the pair of
major tabs 460 is hinged to themain panel 412 by a first fold line. The other one of the pair ofmajor tabs 460 is hinged to themain panel 412 by a second fold line. The first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the second fold line. - One of the pair of minor tabs 462 is hinged to the
main panel 412 by a third fold line. The other one of the pair of minor tabs 462 is hinged to themain panel 412 by a fourth fold line. The third fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line. - The first fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the third fold line. The second fold line is divergently arranged with respect to the fourth fold line.
- The handle openings may form a stabilisation device during application of the
410A, 410B to a group of articles B. The stabilisation devices are configured to receive an abutment peg or dog (described in further detail below).blanks - The opening of the stabilisation devices may be non-circular in shape, and may be substantially square or diamond shaped.
- A peg or dog may be provided for engaging the
410A, 410B via the handle opening to prevent or inhibit linear or rotation movement of theblanks 410A, 410B with respect to the dog. The dog may be mounted to, or integral with, an applicator device, described in more detail below, for applying theblanks 410A, 410B to a group of articles B.blanks - The opening of the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one flat or linear portion for engaging a complementary flat or linear portion of the dog. In other embodiments, the stabilization device or handle opening may comprise at least one generally “V” or “U” shaped portion for engaging a complementary portion of the dog.
- The
410A, 410B are applied simultaneously to a pair of article groups. Theblanks main panels 412 of each blank 410A, 410B is applied to one of the groups of articles B. The pair ofconnected blanks 401 is lowered with respect to the articles B to be at rest thereupon as shown inFIG. 14 . - An applicator device AP is provided to engage the
410A, 410B with the articles B. The applicator device AP comprises a plate orblanks body 450 from which a plurality of guides G may extend. The guides G depend downwardly from theplate 450 and ensure the articles B are maintained in the desired configuration or arrangement to be received by the 410A, 410B. The guides may also ensure or retain the pair ofblanks connected blanks 401 in alignment with the groups of articles B. In the illustrated embodiment, the guides G take the form of a plurality of fingers or elongate members however in other embodiments the guides may take the form of vertical walls depending downwardly from theplate 450 so as to surround at least an upper portion of the pair of article groups. - The applicator device AP comprises a pair of posts P1, P2 forming retention or stabilising pins or lugs depending from the lower or engaging surface of the
plate 450. The illustrated embodiment comprises two stabilising pins, best shown inFIG. 14 . InFIGS. 14 to 17 a portion of the applicator device AP has been cutaway, as indicated by hatching, for illustrative purposes. As the applicator device AP is lowered over the pair ofconnected blanks 401 and articles B, a first post P1 engages the stabilisation device provided by the handle opening of the first blank 410A. A second post P2 engages the stabilisation device provided by the handle opening of the second blank 410B, best shown inFIG. 15 . Thetabs 460, 462 of the handle structures H are folded out of the plane of themain panels 412 as the stabilising pins are received. - A disconnecting device BL depends from a lower surface of the
plate 450, the disconnecting device BL may take the form of a blade mounted substantially perpendicularly with respect to the lower surface of theplate 450. The disconnecting device BL extends transversely across theplate 450. - As the applicator device AP is lowered further with respect to the pair of
connected blanks 401 and articles B, the post P1, P2 are inserted further through the handle openings, the disconnecting device BL is aligned with thefrangible connection 413 and moves downwardly with respect thereto. In doing so the disconnecting device BL severs or cleaves the connecting nicks or bridge portions N1, N2, N3, N4 thereby separating the first and 410A, 410B from each other.second blanks - Continued lowering of the applicator device AP with respect to the pair of
410A, 410B and articles B brings a lower or engaging surface of theblanks plate 450 into contact with the 410A, 410B, as shown inblanks FIG. 16 . - The lower or engaging surface of the
plate 450 comprises a plurality of recesses or orifices OR each adapted to receive an upper portion of an article B. The illustrated embodiment comprises eight orifices OR arranged in 2×4 matrix or array. The orifices OR may be at least partially blind, that is to say they comprise an end stop ES preventing the articles B from passing through theplate 450. - The stabilising pins are now fully inserted into the stabilisation devices so as to prevent or inhibit movement of the pair of
410A, 410B with respect to the applicator AP and retain each blank 410A, 410B in correct alignment with the articles B.blanks - The applicator AP is lowered still further with respect to the articles B so as to press the
410A, 410B over the upper ends of the articles B. The applicator AP presses theblanks 410A, 410B downwardly such that an article B is received in each of the article retention structures RT. Theblanks tabs 440 are folded out of the plane of the engagingpanels 412 and engage below a flange or other suitable projection provided on the articles B, best shown inFIG. 17 to form packages. - The applicator AP is raised with respect to the packages, the assembled packages may be conveyed to further processing stations or to a point of sale.
-
FIG. 18 illustrates a number of alternative blade configurations BL1, BL2, BL3, BL4, BL5. A first blade BL1 comprises a single breaking edge CE which is parallel to a mounting edge ME. The entirety of the breaking edge CE engages the frangible connection simultaneously when in use. - A second blade BL2 comprises a pair of breaking edges CE1, CE2 arranged divergently with respect each other to form a point or vertex. Each of the pair of breaking edges CE1, CE2 is non-parallel, or divergently arranged, with respect to a mounting edge ME.
- A third blade BL3 is shown in
FIG. 18 , the third blade BL3 is substantially similar to the second blade BL2 albeit the pair of breaking edges CE1, CE2 are arranged such that a smaller internal angle is defined therebetween. - A fourth blade BL4 is shown in
FIG. 18 , the fourth blade BL4 is substantially similar to the second and third blades BL2, BL3 albeit the pair of breaking edges CE1, CE2 are arranged such that a smaller internal angle is defined therebetween. In order to achieve this without substantially increasing the height of the fourth blade BL4 each of the pair of breaking edges CE1, CE2 comprises a marginal portion arranged substantially parallel with the mounting edge ME. - A fifth blade BL5 is shown in
FIG. 18 , the fifth blade BL5 comprises a recess, scalloped or serrated breaking edge. The fifth blade BL5 comprises four divergently arranged breaking edges CE1, CE2, CE3, CE4. A first breaking edge CE1 and a second breaking edge CE2 are divergently arranged with respect each other to form a point or vertex substantially at a centre or medial region of the fifth blade BL5. Third and fourth breaking edges CE3, CE4 are provided at marginal regions of the fifth blade BL5. The third breaking edge CE3 is divergently arranged with respect to the first breaking edge CE1 to define a recess R therebetween. The fourth breaking edge CE4 is divergently arranged with respect to the second breaking edge CE2 to define a recess R therebetween. - The third breaking edge CE3 may be arranged to be parallel to the second breaking edge CE2. The fourth breaking edge CE4 may be arranged to be parallel to the first breaking edge CE1.
- The fifth blade BL5 may be considered to have a plurality of breaking edges or blades CE1, CE2, CE3, CE4 mounted to a common base or mounting body.
- The fifth blade BL5 may be advantageous when separating a pair of
410A, 410B in which the articles B in a first group being engaged by the first blank 410A are in contact or close proximity to the articles B in a second group being engaged by the second blank 410B. The recesses R avoid a region of contact or close proximity between pairs or cylindrical articles B. In this way, the fifth blade BL5 avoids contact or impact with the articles B.blanks - Referring now to
FIG. 19 there is shown a packaging apparatus configured to automate application of the pair ofconnected blanks 401 to groups of articles B. The packaging apparatus comprises a plurality of tool heads 702 mounted to anoverhead wheel arrangement 754. - The
overhead wheel arrangement 754 is adapted to maintain the orientation of anapplicator 720 with respect to aconveyor 753. Theapplicator 720 is shown in a cutaway view, as indicated by hatching, for illustrative purposes to illustrate posts P1, P2 mounted thereto. Theapplicator 720 is maintained substantially parallel with theconveyor 753, such that the engaging surface of theplate 450 faces towards the articles B and/or conveyor throughout the rotation of the overhead wheel. - The
applicator 720 is moveably mounted to thetool head 702, and is resiliently biased towards theconveyor 753 by spring mounts 758 depending from a mountingplate 756. - The
applicator 720 differs from that shown inFIGS. 13 to 17 in that the guides G have been omitted, instead the pair ofconnected blanks 401 are aligned with respect to the articles B byreference posts 740 mounted to 732A, 732B, 734.article engaging tools - The packaging apparatus comprises a grouping and metering apparatus and an overhead applicator for applying the pair of connected blanks 410 to metered groups of articles B.
- The metering apparatus comprises a first plurality of
732A, 732B, 734 for engaging, metering, and driving a first column of articles B through the packaging apparatus. The metering apparatus comprises a second plurality of article engaging tools (not illustrated inarticle engaging tools FIG. 19 ), configured in a similar manner to those shown in the embodiments ofFIGS. 7 to 11 for engaging, metering, and driving a second column of articles B through the packaging apparatus. The second plurality of article engaging tools is arranged in opposition to the first plurality of 732A, 732B, 734.article engaging tools - Each of the
732A, 732B, 734 is coupled to, or comprises, a drive mechanism to propel each of the first and second plurality ofarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 about a respective track or loop.article engaging tools - Each of the
732A, 732B, 734 is coupled to, or mounted to, a track a respective track or loop (not shown) having a working reach and a return reach. Thearticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 may comprise a magnet (not shown) for holding thearticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 to the track. The track comprises a drive mechanism for driving thearticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 about the track. The drive mechanism may take the form of a linear motor. A stator comprising coils is mounted to the track and generates propulsive force by acting upon the magnet to drive thearticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 about the track. Each of thearticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 can be independently or individually controlled, In this way, the pitch betweenarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 can be varied and thearticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 can be individually accelerated or decelerated.article engaging tools - Each
732A, 732B, 734 in the first plurality ofarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 is driven in synchronicity with a respective one of the article engaging tools in the second plurality of article engaging tools, at least through a working reach of the packaging apparatus.article engaging tools - The packaging apparatus may merge a first stream of articles B with a second stream of articles B, the first plurality of
732A, 732B, 734 engaging articles from the first stream and the second plurality of article engaging tools engaging articles from the second stream.article engaging tools - Each
732A, 732B, 734 comprises a carriage having at least one wheel orarticle engaging tool follower 746, in some embodiments two, three, four or more wheels orfollowers 746 may be provided on each carriage and engage with the track. - Each carriage comprises a head detachably mounted thereto by a securing mechanism. In some embodiments, the lock mechanism may take the form of a bayonet style fitting or mount. In this way, the head is readily separated from the carriage and may be interchanged, swapped or replaced. This allows the head to be changed for a different head to accommodate a different carton blank or article B or to enable replacement of a damaged or broken head.
- Each of the heads comprises a gripper or scoop providing at least one engaging surface for engaging an article B. The gripper comprises a pair of fingers or limbs defining a recess or channel arranged to accommodate a portion of the article B.
- Each of the heads may comprise a reference pin or post 740 extending upwardly therefrom. The
reference pin 740 is mounted to the head at a first proximal end and extends upwardly to a distal free end. The distal free end is disposed at an elevation above the upper end of the articles B. In this way, thereference pin 740 is configured to engage with the pair ofconnected blanks 401 when placed upon the upper ends of the articles B in the groups of articles B. The heads forming leading and trailingarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B may comprise a first reference pin or post 740. The heads forming intermediatearticle engaging tools 734 may comprise an optional second reference pin or post. The second reference pin or post may be offset, in a direction transverse to the article flow direction F, with respect to the first reference pins 740 provided by the leading and trailingarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B. - The
reference pin 740 is arranged to be located between a leading portion of the head and a trailing portion of the head. Thereference pin 740 is located upstream of a downstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by the head to which it is mounted and thereference pin 740 is located downstream of an upstream end, edge or wall of the article B engaged by said head. - The
reference pin 740 may be disposed within the footprint of the carriage and/or head. In this way, two adjacent carriages or head can be brought into close proximity without interference by thereference pin 740 or its mounting. This enables two or more 732A, 732B, 734 to bring two or more articles B into close proximity or to engage two or more articles B which are disposed in close proximity.article engaging tools - In order to form metered groups of articles B pairs of
732A, 732B, 734 bring together pairs of articles B, one from each of the first and second columns or streams of articles B.article engaging tools - Two or more pairs of
732A, 732B, 734 may be employed to form a at least two groups of articles B, in the illustrated embodiment, four pairs ofarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 form two groups of four articles B each in a 2×2 matrix or array.article engaging tools - In order to form the groups, the leading pair of
article engaging tools 732B may be retarded to allow the intermediate pairs ofarticle engaging tools 734, and the trailing pair of article engaging tools 732A to catch up with the pair of 732A, 732B, 734 disposed downstream thereof. In some embodiments, at least a first pair of intermediatearticle engaging tools article engaging tools 734 catches up with the leading pair ofarticle engaging tools 732B, at least a second pair of intermediatearticle engaging tools 734 follows a predefined distance behind the at least first pair of intermediatearticle engaging tools 734, the trailing pair of article engaging tools 732A catches up with the at least second pair of intermediatearticle engaging tools 734. Once each upstream pair of 732A, 732B, 734 catch the adjacent downstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734, they too may be retarded to match the speed of said downstream pair. In alternative embodiments, it will be appreciated that speed of an upstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734 may be increased or accelerated to catch an adjacent downstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 732A, 732B, 734.article engaging tools - As the
732A, 732B, 734 form the groups of articles B thearticle engaging tools connected blanks 401 are lowered onto the upper ends of the articles B forming the groups. - The overhead wheel arrangement brings the
applicator 720 into contact with theconnected blanks 401 substantially similarly to the applicator AP ofFIG. 14 to 17 to applying the 410A, 410B to the articles B.blanks - Referring now to
FIGS. 20 to 24 there is shown apackaging apparatus 800, best shown inFIG. 24 , configured to automate separation of a pair ofconnected article carriers 491. A pair ofconnected blanks 401 such as those illustrated inFIG. 13 and described above have been applied to a plurality of groups of articles B to from theconnected article carriers 491 at a previous station (not shown) of a packaging machine; the previous station may be similar in configuration to the apparatus ofFIG. 12 and described above albeit with omission of the second stabilising peg orpin 654, the folding dies or brakes may be omitted or replaced with alignment guides. Thepackaging apparatus 800 comprises at least onetool head 802 mounted to anoverhead conveyor arrangement 854 disposed over an article conveyor (not shown). The tool heads 802 are arranged to move in synchronicity with the article conveyor over a working reach of theoverhead conveyor arrangement 854. Theconnected article carriers 491 are transferred downstream, indicated by direction arrow F, upon the article conveyor. The illustrated embodiment comprises a plurality oftool head 802 mounted to atrack 803 and driven thereabout by a drive mechanism. In some embodiments, the drive mechanism may take the form of a chain or belt arranged as an endless loop. In other embodiments, eachtool head 802 may be independently driven about thetrack 803, eachtool head 802 may comprise a drive motor or the drive mechanism may take the form of a linear motor similar to that described above in relation to the 432A, 432B, 434 ofarticle engaging tools FIG. 7 . - Each
tool head 802 comprises a chassis or carriage coupling a separator SP to thetrack 803. The separator SP comprises a plate or frame 850 from which a pair of guides G depends. The pair of guides G are spaced apart from each other and arranged in opposition to each other. The guides G engage with opposing side of theconnected article carriers 491. The guides G prevent or inhibit movement of theconnected article carriers 491 in a direction transverse to the flow direction F. InFIGS. 22 to 24 portions of the separator SP have been cutaway or removed for illustrative purposes and only one guide G is shown. - The separator SP comprises at least one at least one stabilisation peg P1, P2 depending from the
plate 850. The illustrated embodiment comprises a pair of stabilisation pegs P1, P2 depending from theplate 850. Each of the pair of stabilisation pegs P1, P2 engages with a respective one of theconnected article carriers 491. - Each stabilisation peg P1, P2 is received in a handle or finger opening provided in the
main panel 412 of eachconnected article carriers 491. The stabilisation pegs P1, P2 prevent or prevent or inhibit movement of theconnected article carriers 491 whilst the separator SP divides theconnected article carriers 491 into individual, discrete, disconnected,article carriers 491. Each stabilisation pegs P1, P2 comprises afixture 811 mounting the stabilisation peg P1, P2 to theplate 850. Thefixture 811 is received in a mounting orifice MA1, MA2 provided in a lower or inner surface of theplate 850. The mounting orifice MA1, MA2 and thefixture 811 may be shaped as to be coded or keyed to a specific mounting location or orientation. That is to say first post P1 is shaped to be mounted in first mounting orifice MA1 and second post P1 is shaped to be mounted in second mounting orifice MA2; or each post P1, P2 is mounted in a predefined orientation with respect to theplate 850. - The stabilisation peg P1, P2 may be detachably or removably mounted to the applicator AP; 720. An aperture RA1, RA2 may be provided in an upper or outer surface of the
plate 850, the aperture RA1, RA2 is in vertical registry with a respective one of the mounting orifices MA1, MA2. The aperture RA1, RA2 may be provided to secure the stabilisation peg P1, P2 to theplate 850 enabling a fastener, such as, but not limited to a screw or bolt to pass through theplate 850 and in to the stabilisation peg P1, P2. In some embodiments, the aperture RA1, RA2 may be provided to facilitate removal or replacement of the stabilisation peg P1, P2 enabling a tool to be inserted through theplate 850 and providing access to thefixture 811 to press or push thefixture 811 of the stabilisation peg P1, P2 out of the mounting orifice MA1, MA2, this may be advantageous when thefixture 811 is keyed and cannot be rotated within the mounting orifice MA1, MA2. - The separator SP comprises at least one disconnecting or separating device BL. The at least one disconnecting or separating device BL may comprise one or more blades BL1, BL2, BL3, BL4 arranged to avoid collision with the articles being packaged. The illustrated embodiment comprises a pair of disconnecting or separating devices BL each comprising a pair of blades BL1/BL2, BL3/BL4 best shown in
FIG. 21 . A recess BLR separates a first blade BL1, BL3 from a second blade BL2, BL4 in each of the pairs of blades BL1/BL2, BL3/BL4. The recess is configured and arranged to avoid collision of the separating devices BL with the articles B in thearticle carriers 490. Each blade BL1, BL2, BL3, BL4 is mounted to or integral with a bracket mounted to theplate 850. The bracket comprises a base or mountingfoot 808 and aleg 807 extending therefrom, the leg may be arranged to substantially perpendicular to the base 80 and to theplate 850. The base 808 may be mounted within a recess or channel in a lower surface of theplate 850. In other embodiments the blades BL1, BL2, BL3, BL4 and support bracket may be integral with theplate 850. -
FIG. 24 illustrates the separator SP being lowered with respect to theconnected article carriers 491 and brought into contact or engagement with theconnected article carriers 491, the stabilisation peg P1, P2 being received in the handle openings and the separator device BL breaking theconnection 413 between thearticle carrier 490. The separator SP is subsequently raised (not shown) with respect to thearticle carriers 490, the tool heads 802 are return to the start of the working reach of theapparatus 800 to separate a subsequent group ofconnected article carriers 491. - Referring now to
FIGS. 25 and 26 there is shown apackaging apparatus 1400 for use in the packaging system of the present disclosure. In the illustrated embodiment, like numerals have, where possible, been used to denote like parts, albeit with the addition of the prefix “1000”. The alternative embodiment shares many common features with the embodiment ofFIGS. 7 to 12 , therefore only the differences from the embodiment illustrated inFIGS. 7 to 12 will be described in any greater detail. -
FIGS. 25 and 26 illustrate an embodiment of apackaging apparatus 1400 forming part of a packaging machine for assembling theblanks 401 ofFIG. 13 about a groups of articles B. Thepackaging apparatus 1400 may be adapted to package alternative blanks for example but not limited to theblanks 10; 110; 310 shown inFIGS. 1 to 6 . - The
packaging apparatus 1400 comprises a grouping and metering apparatus and an applicator 420 (seeFIG. 26 ) for applying theblanks 401 to a metered group of articles (not shown inFIGS. 25 and 26 ). - The metering apparatus comprises a first plurality of
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B for engaging, metering, and driving a first column of articles through thearticle engaging tools packaging apparatus 1400. The metering apparatus comprises a second plurality of 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B for engaging, metering, and driving a second column of articles through thearticle engaging tools packaging apparatus 1400. The second plurality of 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B is arranged in opposition to the first plurality ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B.article engaging tools - Each of the
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B is coupled to, or comprises, a drive mechanism to propel each of the first and second plurality ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B about a respective track or loop.article engaging tools - Each of the
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B is coupled to, or mounted to, a track a respective track or loop (not shown) having a working reach and a return reach. Each of thearticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B can be independently or individually controlled. In this way, the pitch betweenarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B can be varied and thearticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B can be individually accelerated or decelerated.article engaging tools - Each
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B in the first plurality ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B is driven in synchronicity with a respective one of thearticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B in the second plurality ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B, at least through a working reach of thearticle engaging tools packaging apparatus 1400. - Each
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B is mounted to, or comprises, a carriage (not shown inarticle engaging tool FIGS. 25 and 26 , but substantially similar to thecarriages 448 ofFIGS. 7 to 12 ). - Each
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B comprises aarticle engaging tool head 1442 detachably mounted to the carriage by asecuring mechanism 1444, part of which is shown inFIGS. 25 and 26 . In some embodiments, thelock mechanism 1444 may take the form of a bayonet style fitting or mount. In this way, thehead 1442 is readily separated from the carriage and may be interchanged, swapped or replaced. This allows thehead 1442 to be changed for a different orreplacement head 1442. - Each of the
heads 1442 comprises a gripper orscoop 1443 providing at least one engaging surface for engaging an article. Thegripper 1443 comprises a pair of fingers or limbs defining a recess or channel arranged to accommodate a portion of the article. - Each of the
heads 1442 may comprise at least one pin orpost 1440 extending upwardly therefrom. Thepin 1440 is mounted to thehead 442 at a first proximal end and extends upwardly to a distal free end. The distal free end is disposed at an elevation above the upper end of the articles. In this way, thepin 1440 is configured to engage withblanks 401 when placed upon the upper ends of the articles in the groups of articles. Thepin 1440 comprise a head H1, H2, H3. The head H1, H2, H3 may be integral with thepin 1440, or may be mounted thereto by a suitable mounting mechanism such as but not limited to a screw thread device. - The leading and trailing
1432A, 1432B may comprise aarticle engaging tools first pin 1440 having a first reference head H1 and asecond pin 1440 having a second reference head H2. The first reference head H1 comprises a tapered or generally cone shaped upper end Co, an upper end of the cone may be truncated. The tapered shaped may facilitate alignment of theblanks 401 with respect to the 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B and hence with respect to the articles.article engaging tools - The first reference head H1 may comprise a main body Mb disposed between the tapered upper end Co and the
pin 1440. The main body Mb may be generally cylindrical in shape and may be larger in diameter than thepin 1440. - Optionally, an inclined or tapered transition region may be provided between the main body Mb and the
pin 1440, this may prevent or inhibit snagging, or catching, of theblanks 401 on the first reference head H1. The first reference head H1 is configured to engage a side edge of theblanks 401 to align theblanks 401 in direction transverse to the direction of travel F. - The second reference head H2 is substantially similar in construction to the first reference head H1 albeit with the addition of an annular or disc shaped protrusion forming a
flange 1449 between the main body Mb and thepin 1440. Theflange 1449 provides an upward facing ledge upon which one of theblanks 401 may rest. - The second reference head H2 is arranged such that the
flange 1449 is below a corner region of theblanks 401. Theblanks 401 comprise rounded, filleted, or chamfered corners at each end thereof, theflange 1449 is disposed below the filleted endmost corners so as to support or engage a corner of one of theblanks 401 when applied to the articles by theapplicator 420. In this way, theflange 1449 prevents or inhibits undesirable deformation or creasing of theblanks 401 during application to the articles. - A lower surface of the
flange 1449 may be inclined or tapered to provide a transition region between theflange 1449 and thepin 1440, this may prevent or inhibit snagging, or catching, of theblanks 401 on the second reference head H2. - The second reference head H2 is configured to engage rounded, filleted, or chamfered corners at each end of the pair of
410A, 410B to align theblanks blanks 401 in direction transverse and or parallel to the direction of travel F with respect to the articles. - The
heads 1442 forming intermediate 1434A, 1434B may comprise an optional third pin orarticle engaging tools post 1440. The third pin orpost 1440 comprises a third head H3. A leading or downstream one 1434B of the intermediate 1434A, 1434B comprises aarticle engaging tools pin 1440 having a third head H3 mounted to a trailing region of the gripper orscoop 1443. A trailing or upstream one 1434A of the intermediate 1434A, 1434B comprises aarticle engaging tools pin 1440 having a third head H3 mounted to a leading region of the gripper orscoop 1443; In this way, the trailing intermediatearticle engaging tool 1434A is a mirror image of the leading intermediatearticle engaging tool 1434B. The third pins orposts 1440 are mounted to primary or inner pin mounts of thehead 1442. - The intermediate
1434A, 1434B may comprise optional pin mounts PM (also referred to herein as outer pin mounts PM), the pin mounts PM are adapted to receive aarticle engaging tools pin 1440 which may have one of the heads H1, H2, H3 mounted thereto. The outer pin mounts PM are arranged such that when mounted thereto thepins 1440 are laterally offset with respect to the first andsecond pins 1440 of the leading and trailing 1432A, 1432B. The outer pin mounts PM are arranged to be laterally offset with respect to the primary or inner pin mounts of the intermediatearticle engaging tools 1434A, 1434B. The optional pin mounts PM are offset in a direction transverse to the direction of travel F. Thearticle engaging tools pins 1440 when mounted to the optional pin mount PM of an intermediate 1434A, 1434B in the first plurality ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B and to the optional pin mount PM of an intermediatearticle engaging tools 1434A, 1434B in the second plurality ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B are spaced apart by a distance which is greater than when the third pins are mounted to the primary or inner pin mounts of the intermediatearticle engaging tools 1434A, 1434B.article engaging tools Third pins 1440, optionally with one of the heads H1, H2, H3 mounted thereto, may be mounted in the optional pin mounts PM instead or in addition to the primary or inner pin mounts of thehead 1442. The optional pin mounts PM may be employed when applying blanks of alternative carriers to at least one article group. - The third head H3 comprises, or takes the form of, a disc or
platform 1447 mounted to the upper end of thepin 1440 to provide a support surface for engaging a portion of one of theblanks 401. - The
blanks 401 comprise rounded, filleted, or chamfered corners at or proximate afrangible connection 413 between a pair of 410A, 410B, ablanks platform 1447 is disposed below the filleted inner corner of each blank 410A, 410B so as to support or engage the corners of each of the pair of 410A, 410B when applied to the articles by theblanks applicator 420. In this way, theplatform 1447 prevents or inhibits undesirable deformation or creasing of theblanks 401 during application to the articles. - In order to form a metered group of articles, pairs of
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B bring together pairs of articles, one from each of the first and second columns or streams of articles B.article engaging tools - Two or more pairs of
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B may be employed to form a group of articles, in the illustrated embodiment four pairs ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B form two groups each of four articles in a 2×2 matrix or array.article engaging tools - In order to form the group, the leading pair of
article engaging tools 1432B may be retarded to allow the intermediate pairs of 1434A, 1434B, and the trailing pair ofarticle engaging tools article engaging tools 1432A to catch up with the pair of 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B disposed downstream thereof. Once each upstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B catch the adjacent downstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B, they too may be retarded to match the speed of said downstream pair. In alternative embodiments, it will be appreciated that speed of an upstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B may be increased or accelerated to catch an adjacent downstream pair ofarticle engaging tools 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B.article engaging tools - As the
1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B form the groups of articles a pair ofarticle engaging tools 410A, 410B is lowered onto the upper ends of the articles B forming the group.blanks - The
blanks 401 are lowered or fed from above by an overhead conveyor (not shown) and are moved in the downstream direction with the articles, leading registration edges provided by the pair of leading corners of the leading blank 410A, are brought into contact with the reference body Mb of the second head H2 mounted to the leadingpins 1440 of respective ones of the leading pair ofarticle engaging tools 1432B. - Side edges of the leading blank 410A are brought into contact with the reference body Mb of the first head H1 mounted to the trailing
pins 1440 of respective ones of the leading pair ofarticle engaging tools 1432B. - When the trailing pair of
article engaging tools 1432A completes formation of the group of articles, the reference body Mb of the second head H2 mounted to each of the trailingpins 1440 of the trailing pair ofarticle engaging tools 1432A is brought into contact with a respective one of the trailing registration edges provided by the pair of trailing corners of the trailing blank 410B. Theblanks 401 are confined between the first and second heads H1, H2 of the leading and trailing 1432B, 1432A. The first and second heads H1, H2 ensure the blank is correctly aligned with respect to the group of articles and maintains this alignment as thearticle engaging tools blanks 401, and articles, move in a downstream direction through the packaging machine. - The
packaging apparatus 1400 comprises anapplicator 420 for effecting application of the main or engagingpanel 412 of theblanks 401 to the articles. - The
applicator 420 comprises a plate 421 (seeFIG. 26 ), a lower or engaging surface of theplate 421 comprises a plurality of recesses or orifices each adapted to receive an upper portion of an article. The illustrated embodiment comprises eight orifices arranged in 2×4 matrix or array. - The
plate 421 may comprises one or more retention or stabilising pins or lugs (not shown inFIG. 26 ) depending from the lower or engaging surface of theplate 421. - The
applicator 420 is lowered with respect to the articles so as to press theblanks 401 over the upper ends of the articles. Theapplicator 420 is brought into contact with theblanks 401, the stabilising pins 450, when present, are received by the stabilisation devices in the 410A, 410B. Theblanks blanks 401 are pressed downwardly such that an article is received in each of the article retention structures RT1, RT2. Thetabs 440 are folded out of the plane of the engagingpanel 412 and engage below a flange or other suitable projection provided on the articles. - The
applicator 420 may comprise at least one blade or separation device for separating the pair of 410A, 410B from each other during or after application to the articles.blanks - The corners, or target regions, of the
410A, 410B may be brought into contact with the support surfaces of theblanks platform 1447 andflange 1449 when theblanks 401 are applied to the articles by the applicator. The support surfaces prevent or inhibit deformation, or creasing, of the 410A, 410B in the corner regions. The support surfaces prevent or inhibit the corners, or target regions, being lowered, or displaced, beyond a predefined height set or determined by the support surfaces.blanks - In alternative embodiments, the
pins 1440 and/or the heads H1, H2, H3, in particular the second and third heads H2, H3 (or their respective pins 1440), may be resiliently biased in an upward or vertical direction. Thepins 1440 and/or heads H1, H2, H3 may move downwardly when the applicator presses theblanks 401 onto the articles. In this way, the support surfaces provided by theflange 1449 andplatform 1447 can be disposed in contact with the lower surface of the of theblanks 401 prior to application of theblanks 401 onto the articles by theapplicator 420, that is to say prior to engagement of the articles in the article retention structures RT1, RT2, and may remain in contact with said lower surface of theblanks 401 during the application or engagement phase. A detent or other catch may be provided to prevent upward movement of thepins 1440 or head H1, H2, H3 once theapplicator 420 is disengaged, the detent or catch may be released once the 1432A, 1432B, 1434A, 1434B disengage the articles, for example, but not limited to, whilst being conveyed upon the return reach of the track.article engaging tools - The present disclosure provides a
carrier 90; 190; 390; 490 of the top engaging type having article retention structures RT1, RT2 for engaging articles B and a blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B for forming thearticle carrier 90; 190; 390; 490. - The
carrier 90; 190; 390; 490 comprises amain panel 12; 112; 312; 412 having one or more article retention structures RT1, RT2 for receiving and securing themain panel 12; 112; 312; 412 to a respective article B. Thecarrier 90; 190; 390 may comprise a pair of opposing 18, 20; 118, 120; 314, 316 hingedly connected to theside panels main panel 12; 112; 312 by a hinged connection. - The
carrier 90; 190; 390 may comprise a pair of opposing 14, 16; 114A, 114B, 116A, 116B; 324, 334 hingedly connected to the main or engagingend panels panel 12; 112; 312 by a hinged connection. - The blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B comprises a peripheral edge a portion of which may provide at least one registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions when engaged by a reference device or
pin 440; 540; 640; 740. - The
carrier 90; 190; 390 may comprise a 18, 20; 118, 120; 318, 320 hinged to thepanel main panel 12; 112; 312, the 18, 20; 118, 120; 318, 320 comprising a registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions.panel - The
carrier 90; 190; 390 may comprise a pair of 18, 20; 118, 120; 318, 320 hinged to thepanels main panel 12; 112; 312 on opposing sides thereof, the pair of 18, 20; 118, 120; 318, 320 each comprise a registration edge shaped to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions.panels - A linear notional line N1, N2 passing through the registration edge in each of pair of
18, 20; 118, 120; 318, 320 passes through an opening in thepanels main panel 12; 112; 312 defined by article retention structures RT1, RT2 provided therein. - The main or engaging
panel 12; 112; 312; 412 may comprise at least one stabilisation device M providing an opening in themain panel 12; 112; 312; 412 and arranged to inhibit movement in two orthogonal directions. - The present disclosure provides an
apparatus 400; 500; 600; 700 for packaging one or more articles in anarticle carrier 90; 190; 390; 490. Theapparatus 400; 500; 600; 700 comprises an 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 for engaging an article B and conveying the article B in a downstream direction. Thearticle engaging tool 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 comprises a reference device, in the form of an abutment pin or peg 440; 540; 640; 740 for aligning a blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B with respect to the articles B.article engaging tool - The abutment pin or peg 440; 540; 640; 740 may comprise a head H1, H2, H3. The head H1, H2 may provide a reference body Mb. The reference body Mb provides a wall for engaging an edge of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B. the wall may be a cylindrical wall. An upper end of the head may be tapered to provide an inclined or conical surface for aligning the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B with the reference body Mb. The head H2, H3 may provide a support surface for preventing, inhibiting or reducing undesired deformation or creasing of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B in a target region thereof. The head H2 may comprise a reference body Mb mounted, or extending from, the support surface.
- The
432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 may comprise aarticle engaging tool removable head 442; 542 to which the reference device is mounted. Thehead 442; 542 may comprise part of a tool-less attachment or mounting system, such as, but not limited to, a bayonet fitting. - The
apparatus 400; 500; 600; 700 may comprise a plurality of 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 each for engaging a respective article B, metering and grouping the articles B and conveying said articles B in a downstream direction as a metered group. Each of the plurality ofarticle engaging tools 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 is driven independently about an endless track having a working reach and a return reach.article engaging tools - The plurality of
432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 may be configured to form a metered group of articles B and align a blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B therewith. The articles B may be formed into the metered group and simultaneously aligned with a blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B as it is fed onto the upper ends of the articles B. The blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B may be brought into contact or alignment with anarticle engaging tools abutment pin 440; 540; 640; 740 mounted to a leading or downstream one of the plurality of 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 forming the article group.article engaging tools - The blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B may be brought into contact or alignment with an
abutment pin 440; 540; 640; 740 mounted to each of a pair of leading or downstream one of the plurality of 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 forming the article group.article engaging tools - At least one
abutment pin 440; 540; 640; 740 mounted to a trailing or upstream one of the plurality of 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 forming the article group may be brought into contact with the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B as the formation of the article group is completed.article engaging tools - The
abutment pin 440; 540; 640; 740 may be shaped to provide at least two points of contact with the registration edge to inhibit movement of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B parallel with the direction of flow of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B through theapparatus 400; 500; 600; 700 and perpendicularly or laterally with respect to the direction of flow of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B through theapparatus 400; 500; 600; 700. - The
apparatus 400; 500; 600; 700 may comprise anapplicator 420; 520; 620; 720; AP for pressing the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B onto the group of articles B. Theapplicator 420; 520; 620; 720; AP may comprise a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article B of the group. - The
applicator 420; 520; 620; 720; AP comprises at least onestabilisation peg 450; 650, 654; P1, P2 receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device M provided in themain panel 12; 112; 312; 412. The at least onestabilisation peg 450; 650, 654; P1, P2 constrains movement of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B with respect to theapplicator 420; 520; 620; 720; AP. - The at least one
stabilisation peg 450; 650, 654; P1, P2 prevents or inhibits movement of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B with respect to the articles B in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B through theapparatus 400; 500; 600; 700 and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B through theapparatus 400; 500; 600; 700. - The
applicator 420; 520; 620; 720; AP is mounted to an overhead conveyor, in the form of a wheel, which applies or engages the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B with the group of articles B as it is conveyed downstream by the plurality of 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734.article engaging tools - The
applicator 420; 520; 620; 720; AP may comprise one or more folding dies or brakes each folding a panel hinged to themain panel 12; 112; 312; 412 at least partially about the group of articles B, said panel may comprise the registration edge. - In some embodiments, one or more panels of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B may be brought into contact with a static folding guide while the
applicator 420; 520; 620; 720; AP is in engagement or contact with the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B. - The present disclosure provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles B. The method comprises conveying a stream of articles B in a downstream direction through a packaging apparatus, engaging each article B with an
432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734, grouping a plurality of articles B, and simultaneously applying a blank to upper ends of the articles B. The method comprises engaging at least one leading registration edge of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B with aarticle engaging tool reference pin 440; 540; 640; 740 mounted to a leading 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734. The method comprises metering the group of articles B and engaging aarticle engaging tool reference pin 440; 540; 640; 740 mounted to a trailing 432A, 432B, 434; 532A, 532B, 534; 632A, 632B, 634; 732A, 732B, 734 with at least one trailing registration edge of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B.article engaging tool - The method further comprises applying the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B to the group of articles B to engage each article B in a respective article retention device RT1, RT2 provided in a
main panel 12; 112; 312; 412 of the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B. Applying the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B to the group of articles B comprises inserting a stabilisingpeg 450; 650, 654; P1, P2 in an opening of a stabilisation device M provided in themain panel 12; 112; 312; 412 prior to pressing the main panel onto the group of articles B. - Applying the blank 10; 110; 310; 410A-B to the group of articles B may further comprise at least partially folding one or more panels comprising the leading and/or trailing registration edges and coupled to the
main panel 12; 112; 312; 412. Said one or more panels may be folded prior to, simultaneously with, or after themain panel 12; 112; 312; 412 engages the group of articles B. - The present disclosure provides a
carrier 490 of the top engaging type having article retention structures RT, RT1, RT2 for engaging articles B and a blank 410A-B for forming thearticle carrier 490. The present disclosure provides a plurality ofconnected blanks 401 which can be simultaneously applied to a plurality of groups of articles B. Each of theblanks 410A-B in a plurality ofconnected blanks 401 is frangibly connected to at least one other blank 410A-B. - The present disclosure provides an
apparatus 700 for packaging one or more articles in anarticle carrier 490. The apparatus may comprise an 732A, 732B, 734 for engaging an article B and conveying the article B in a downstream direction. Thearticle engaging tool 732A, 732B, 734 comprises a reference device, in the form of an abutment pin or peg 740, for aligning a plurality ofarticle engaging tool connected blanks 401 with respect to the articles B. - The plurality of
732A, 732B, 734 may be configured to form metered groups of articles B and align a plurality ofarticle engaging tools connected blanks 401 therewith. The articles B may be formed into the metered groups and simultaneously aligned with a plurality ofconnected blanks 401 as it is fed onto the upper ends of the articles B. The plurality ofconnected blanks 401 may be brought into contact or alignment with anabutment pin 740 mounted to a leading or downstream one of the plurality of 732A, 732B, 734 forming the article groups.article engaging tools - The plurality of
connected blanks 401 may be brought into contact or alignment with anabutment pin 740 mounted to each of a pair of leading or downstream one of the plurality of 732A, 732B, 734 forming the article groups.article engaging tools - At least one
abutment pin 740 mounted to a trailing or upstream one of the plurality of 732A, 732B, 734 forming the article groups may be brought into contact with the plurality ofarticle engaging tools connected blanks 401 as the formation of the article group is completed. - The
abutment pin 740 may be shaped to provide at least two points of contact with the registration edge to inhibit movement of the plurality ofconnected blanks 401 parallel with the direction of flow of the plurality ofconnected blanks 401 through theapparatus 700 and perpendicularly or laterally with respect to the direction of flow of the plurality ofconnected blanks 401 through theapparatus 700. - The present disclosure provides an applicator AP; 720 for pressing the plurality of
connected blanks 401 onto the groups of articles B. The applicator AP; 720 may comprise a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article B of the group. Theapplicator 720 may form part oftool head 702 mounted to anoverhead wheel arrangement 754 for applying or engaging the plurality ofconnected blanks 401 to the groups of articles B as they are conveyed upon a conveyor in a downstream direction. The applicator AP; 720 comprises at least one disconnecting or separating device for breaking thefrangible connections 413 between adjacentlydisposed blanks 410A-B. - The applicator AP; 720 may comprise at least one stabilisation peg P1, P2 receivable in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in the
main panel 412 of at least one blank 410A-B forming the plurality ofconnected blanks 401. The at least one stabilisation peg P1, P2 constrains movement of the plurality ofconnected blanks 401 with respect to the applicator AP; 720. - The at least one stabilisation peg P1, P2 prevents or inhibits movement of the plurality of
connected blanks 401 with respect to the articles B in a direction parallel with the direction of flow of the plurality of connected blanks 1 through the packaging apparatus and in a lateral direction perpendicular with respect to the direction of flow of the plurality ofconnected blanks 401 through the packaging apparatus. - The stabilisation peg P1, P2 may be detachably or removably mounted to the applicator AP; 720. The stabilisation peg P1, P2 may be coded or keyed to a specific mounting location or orientation.
- The disconnecting or separating device may comprise one or more blades CE1, CE2, CE3, CE4, BL; BL1; BL2, BL3; BL4; BL5 arranged to avoid collision with the articles being packaged. The blades may be mounted to a common body in a spaced apart configuration. The blades be arranged to be received in gaps or voids between two or more articles B, the articles B being generally cylindrical in shape. The
frangible connections 413 may comprise connecting nicks or bridging portions N1, N2, N3, N4 in vertical registry with the gaps or voids between two or more articles B. The connecting nicks or bridging portions N1, N2, N3, N4 may be arranged in pairs disposed on substantially opposing sides of a region of closest proximity between an article B in a first blank and an article B in a second connected blank. - The blades BL, BL2, BL3 may be detachably or removably mounted to the applicator AP; 720 such that the arrangement of the blades BL, BL2, BL3 is reconfigurable depending upon the arrangement and/or size of the blanks being applied to the articles B.
- The present disclosure also provides a disconnecting apparatus for separating a plurality of connected article carriers into discrete carriers. The disconnecting apparatus may comprise a plurality of article receiving orifices each for receiving a respective article B of the group. The disconnecting apparatus may comprise at least one blades BL; BL1; BL2, BL3; BL4; BL5 detachably or removably mounted thereto such that the arrangement of the blades BL; BL1; BL2, BL3; BL4; BL5 is reconfigurable depending upon the arrangement and/or size of the blanks being applied to the articles B.
- The blade BL; BL1; BL2, BL3; BL4; BL5 may be supported in a direction transverse by a support or supplementary blade. The blade and the support or supplementary blade may each comprise receiver in the form of recess or slot for receiving a portion of the other.
- The present disclosure provides a method of packaging a plurality of articles B. The method comprises conveying a stream of articles B in a downstream direction through a packaging apparatus, engaging each article B with an
732A, 732B, 734, grouping a plurality of articles B, and simultaneously applying a plurality ofarticle engaging tool connected blanks 401 to upper ends of the articles B. The method comprises engaging at least one leading registration edge of the blank plurality ofconnected blanks 401 with areference pin 740 mounted to a leading 732A, 732B, 734. The method comprises metering the group of articles B and engaging aarticle engaging tool reference pin 740 mounted to a trailing 732A, 732B, 734 with at least one trailing registration edge of the plurality ofarticle engaging tool connected blanks 401. - The method further comprises separating the plurality of
connected blanks 401 into 410A, 410B and applying thediscrete blanks 410A, 410B simultaneously to respective groups of articles B. Separating the plurality ofdiscrete blanks connected blanks 401 comprises inserting a stabilising peg P1, P2 in an opening of a stabilisation device provided in themain panel 412 prior to severing a frangible connection between pairs of 410A, 410B.blanks - The
blanks 10; 110; 310; 410A-B include at least a paperboard substrate. The material of the paperboard substrate may be selected from any conventional paperboard, for example, ranging in weight upwardly from about 10 pt., preferably from about 16 pt. to about 28 pt. (0.028″/˜0.7 mm). An example of such a substrate is a 27 point (pt.) SBS board (solid bleached sulphate paperboard coated on one side, trade name PrintKote®) or CNK® board (Coated Natural Kraft®—an unbleached kraft paperboard having a clay coating on one side, trade name CarrierKote™) manufactured by WestRock® Company. The paperboard substrate may be a bleached or unbleached board. The board may be coated on at least one side, optionally the side opposite the lamination, with a conventional coating selected for compatibility with the printing method and board composition. - The
blanks 10; 110; 310; 410A-B may include a tear resistant layer laminated to the paperboard layer. It optionally includes an adhesive layer between the paperboard substrate and the tear resistant layer. The tear resistant layer may be disposed over the uncoated side of the paperboard substrate and may be formed of polymeric material and secured to the substrate. The tear resistant layer imparts toughness to the laminate structure. Suitable tear resistant materials may include, but not be limited to, tear resistant laminated sheet material, e.g., NATRALOCK®, which may include a layer of an n-axially oriented film, e.g., MYLAR®, which is a bi-axially oriented polyester, oriented nylon, cross-laminated polyolefin or high-density polyolefin. The orientation and cross-laminated structure of these materials contribute to the tear resistant characteristic. Also, tear resistance may be attributed to the chemical nature of the tear resistant material such as extruded metallocene-catalysed polyethylene (mPE). - Alternatively, the tear resistant layer may be a layer of linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE). In embodiments where linear low-density polyethylene (LLDPE) or mPE is used, it is not necessary to incorporate an adhesive layer. Other suitable materials having a high level of tear resistance may also be used.
- The adhesive layer may be formed of polyolefin material such as a low-density polyethylene (LDPE). The adhesive layer may be placed between the substrate and the tear resistant layer to secure the tear resistant layer to the substrate.
- It can be appreciated that various changes may be made within the scope of the present invention. For example, the size and shape of the panels and apertures may be adjusted to accommodate articles of differing size or shape. The shoulder panels may be omitted. The present invention is not limited to cartons of the top-engaging type, the invention may be employed with other carton styles such as, but not limited to, open top crates, lidded or closed top crates. In various embodiments, the separator device may be readily adapted to apply blanks to groups of articles B, similarly the applicator device may be readily adapted to separate a plurality of connected article carriers.
- It will be recognised that as used herein, directional references such as “top”, “bottom”, “base”, “front”, “back”, “end”, “side”, “inner”, “outer”, “upper” and “lower” do not necessarily limit the respective panels to such orientation, but may merely serve to distinguish these panels from one another.
- As used herein, the terms “hinged connection” and “fold line” refer to all manner of lines that define hinge features of the blank, facilitate folding portions of the blank with respect to one another, or otherwise indicate optimal panel folding locations for the blank. Any reference to “hinged connection” should not be construed as necessarily referring to a single fold line only; indeed, a hinged connection can be formed from two or more fold lines wherein each of the two or more fold lines may be either straight/linear or curved/curvilinear in shape. When linear fold lines form a hinged connection, they may be disposed parallel with each other or be slightly angled with respect to each other. When curvilinear fold lines form a hinged connection, they may intersect each other to define a shaped panel within the area surrounded by the curvilinear fold lines. A typical example of such a hinged connection may comprise a pair of arched or arcuate fold lines intersecting at two points such that they define an elliptical panel therebetween. A hinged connection may be formed from one or more linear fold lines and one or more curvilinear fold lines. A typical example of such a hinged connection may comprise a combination of a linear fold line and an arched or arcuate fold line which intersect at two points such that they define a half moon-shaped panel therebetween.
- As used herein, the term “fold line” may refer to one of the following: a scored line, an embossed line, a debossed line, a line of perforations, a line of short slits, aline of half-cuts, a single half-cut, an interrupted cutline, aline of aligned slits, a line of scores and any combination of the aforesaid options.
- It should be understood that hinged connections and fold lines can each include elements that are formed in the substrate of the blank including perforations, a line of perforations, a line of short slits, a line of half-cuts, a single half-cut, a cutline, an interrupted cutline, slits, scores, embossed lines, debossed lines, any combination thereof, and the like. The elements can be dimensioned and arranged to provide the desired functionality. For example, a line of perforations can be dimensioned or designed with degrees of weakness to define a fold line and/or a severance line. The line of perforations can be designed to facilitate folding and resist breaking, to facilitate folding and facilitate breaking with more effort, or to facilitate breaking with little effort.
- The phrase “in registry with” as used herein refers to the alignment of two or more elements in an erected carton, such as an aperture formed in a first of two overlapping panels and a second aperture formed in a second of two overlapping panels. Those elements in registry with each other may be aligned with each other in the direction of the thickness of the overlapping panels. For example, when an aperture in a first panel is “in registry with” a second aperture in a second panel that is placed in an overlapping arrangement with the first panel, an edge of the aperture may extend along at least a portion of an edge of the second aperture and may be aligned, in the direction of the thickness of the first and second panels, with the second aperture.
Claims (94)
Priority Applications (7)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/US2023/073815 WO2024055026A2 (en) | 2022-09-09 | 2023-09-10 | Packaging system |
| KR1020257010212A KR20250067836A (en) | 2022-09-09 | 2023-09-10 | Goods interlocking carrier, packaging device and packaging method |
| JP2025514583A JP2025530266A (en) | 2022-09-09 | 2023-09-10 | Packaging System |
| CA3267078A CA3267078A1 (en) | 2022-09-09 | 2023-09-10 | Packaging system |
| AU2023338582A AU2023338582A1 (en) | 2022-09-09 | 2023-09-10 | Packaging system |
| EP23783656.4A EP4584160A2 (en) | 2022-09-09 | 2023-09-10 | Packaging system |
| MX2025002609A MX2025002609A (en) | 2022-09-09 | 2025-03-04 | Packaging system |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US202163213420P | 2021-06-22 | 2021-06-22 | |
| US202163250821P | 2021-09-30 | 2021-09-30 | |
| US202163287476P | 2021-12-08 | 2021-12-08 | |
| PCT/US2022/034305 WO2022271672A1 (en) | 2021-06-22 | 2022-06-21 | Packaging |
Related Parent Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/US2022/034305 Continuation-In-Part WO2022271672A1 (en) | 2021-06-22 | 2022-06-21 | Packaging |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| US20230406589A1 true US20230406589A1 (en) | 2023-12-21 |
Family
ID=84545927
Family Applications (2)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US18/572,648 Pending US20240336381A1 (en) | 2021-06-22 | 2022-06-21 | Packaging |
| US17/941,146 Pending US20230406589A1 (en) | 2021-06-22 | 2022-09-09 | Packaging system |
Family Applications Before (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US18/572,648 Pending US20240336381A1 (en) | 2021-06-22 | 2022-06-21 | Packaging |
Country Status (11)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (2) | US20240336381A1 (en) |
| EP (1) | EP4359316A1 (en) |
| JP (1) | JP2024524998A (en) |
| KR (1) | KR20240024902A (en) |
| AU (1) | AU2022297372A1 (en) |
| CA (1) | CA3223864A1 (en) |
| CL (1) | CL2023003808A1 (en) |
| CO (1) | CO2024000258A2 (en) |
| MX (1) | MX2023015044A (en) |
| TW (1) | TW202319309A (en) |
| WO (1) | WO2022271672A1 (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20240253883A1 (en) * | 2021-08-30 | 2024-08-01 | Krones Aktiengesellschaft | Packaging device, packaging unit, and method for producing packaging units |
Families Citing this family (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| WO2025058948A2 (en) * | 2023-09-11 | 2025-03-20 | Westrock Packaging Systems, Llc | Packaging system |
| WO2025166470A1 (en) * | 2024-02-08 | 2025-08-14 | Herrera Munoz Jorge Fundador | System, device and methods for forming multi-packs of beverage cans |
Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US5791463A (en) * | 1992-08-14 | 1998-08-11 | Riverwood International Corporation | Holding arrangement for cans |
| US6039181A (en) * | 1995-05-02 | 2000-03-21 | Whiteside; G. Michael | Transit packaging having reduced content |
| US20040206639A1 (en) * | 2001-07-03 | 2004-10-21 | Kenneth Karlsson | Carrier for cans and a carboard blank for a carrier for cans |
| US20230382619A1 (en) * | 2022-05-26 | 2023-11-30 | Graphic Packaging International, Llc | Carrier For Containers |
Family Cites Families (10)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| GB8333706D0 (en) * | 1983-12-19 | 1984-01-25 | Mead Corp | Packaging machine method |
| WO2008058186A2 (en) * | 2006-11-07 | 2008-05-15 | Graphic Packaging International, Inc. | Packages and packaging system |
| WO2009064951A2 (en) * | 2007-11-15 | 2009-05-22 | Graphic Packaging International, Inc. | Package for containers |
| GB0723792D0 (en) * | 2007-12-05 | 2008-01-16 | Meadwestvaco Packaging Systems | Carton and carton blank |
| GB0801889D0 (en) * | 2008-02-01 | 2008-03-12 | Meadwestvaco Packaging Systems | Twin packaging line and metering system |
| JP5474099B2 (en) * | 2009-02-24 | 2014-04-16 | グラフィック パッケージング インターナショナル インコーポレイテッド | Container package |
| JP7317701B2 (en) * | 2016-09-12 | 2023-07-31 | ウエストロック・パッケージング・システムズ・エルエルシー | Applicator plate, apparatus and method |
| JP6890961B2 (en) * | 2016-12-08 | 2021-06-18 | ウエストロック・パッケージング・システムズ・エルエルシー | Blanks and cartons |
| AU2021264426B2 (en) * | 2020-04-28 | 2024-09-12 | Graphic Packaging International, Llc | Method and system for attaching articles to a carrier |
| KR20240090198A (en) * | 2021-09-24 | 2024-06-21 | 그래픽 팩키징 인터내셔날, 엘엘씨 | Method and system for manufacturing blanks for forming carriers for containers |
-
2022
- 2022-06-21 WO PCT/US2022/034305 patent/WO2022271672A1/en not_active Ceased
- 2022-06-21 MX MX2023015044A patent/MX2023015044A/en unknown
- 2022-06-21 AU AU2022297372A patent/AU2022297372A1/en active Pending
- 2022-06-21 JP JP2023579326A patent/JP2024524998A/en active Pending
- 2022-06-21 CA CA3223864A patent/CA3223864A1/en active Pending
- 2022-06-21 KR KR1020247000867A patent/KR20240024902A/en active Pending
- 2022-06-21 EP EP22744012.0A patent/EP4359316A1/en active Pending
- 2022-06-21 US US18/572,648 patent/US20240336381A1/en active Pending
- 2022-06-22 TW TW111123281A patent/TW202319309A/en unknown
- 2022-09-09 US US17/941,146 patent/US20230406589A1/en active Pending
-
2023
- 2023-12-20 CL CL2023003808A patent/CL2023003808A1/en unknown
-
2024
- 2024-01-15 CO CONC2024/0000258A patent/CO2024000258A2/en unknown
Patent Citations (4)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US5791463A (en) * | 1992-08-14 | 1998-08-11 | Riverwood International Corporation | Holding arrangement for cans |
| US6039181A (en) * | 1995-05-02 | 2000-03-21 | Whiteside; G. Michael | Transit packaging having reduced content |
| US20040206639A1 (en) * | 2001-07-03 | 2004-10-21 | Kenneth Karlsson | Carrier for cans and a carboard blank for a carrier for cans |
| US20230382619A1 (en) * | 2022-05-26 | 2023-11-30 | Graphic Packaging International, Llc | Carrier For Containers |
Cited By (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20240253883A1 (en) * | 2021-08-30 | 2024-08-01 | Krones Aktiengesellschaft | Packaging device, packaging unit, and method for producing packaging units |
| US12448191B2 (en) * | 2021-08-30 | 2025-10-21 | Krones Aktiengesellschaft | Packaging device, packaging unit, and method for producing packaging units |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| JP2024524998A (en) | 2024-07-09 |
| MX2023015044A (en) | 2024-04-24 |
| CL2023003808A1 (en) | 2024-05-31 |
| WO2022271672A1 (en) | 2022-12-29 |
| CO2024000258A2 (en) | 2024-01-25 |
| CA3223864A1 (en) | 2022-12-29 |
| AU2022297372A1 (en) | 2024-01-18 |
| TW202319309A (en) | 2023-05-16 |
| EP4359316A1 (en) | 2024-05-01 |
| KR20240024902A (en) | 2024-02-26 |
| US20240336381A1 (en) | 2024-10-10 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US20230406589A1 (en) | Packaging system | |
| US12065293B2 (en) | Carton with integral handle and package | |
| US20240002122A1 (en) | Carton and blank therefor | |
| US20240400245A1 (en) | Packaging system | |
| US11932472B2 (en) | Carton and blank therefor | |
| US20200216246A1 (en) | Carton and blank therefor | |
| US20240409258A1 (en) | Systems and methods for packaging articles within a carton | |
| CA3202204A1 (en) | Article carriers and blanks therefor | |
| AU2017326156B2 (en) | Carton and carton blank | |
| AU2023338582A1 (en) | Packaging system | |
| AU2020359410A1 (en) | Article carrier, blank and method of constructing the same | |
| US20250162776A1 (en) | Article carrier and blank therefor | |
| US20250026552A1 (en) | Article carrier and blank therefor | |
| US20230391523A1 (en) | Article carrier and blank therefor | |
| US20220297911A1 (en) | Article carrier and blank therfor | |
| US20250136342A1 (en) | Article carrier and blank therefor | |
| US11993439B2 (en) | Carton and blank therefor | |
| US20250011021A1 (en) | Packaging system and apparatus | |
| CN117836218A (en) | Package | |
| EP4326623A1 (en) | System and method for packaging articles within a carton |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
| STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |